You are on page 1of 432

B-GL-382-004/FP-001

TRAINING

CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT


(ENGLISH)

(Supersedes B-GL-318-018/PT-001 dated 1992-08-24.)

WARNING
ALTHOUGH NOT CLASSIFIED, THIS PUBLICATION, OR ANY PART OF IT, MAY BE EXEMPT FROM DISCLOSURE TO THE
PUBLIC UNDER THE ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACT. ALL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MUST BE
CLOSELY SCRUTINIZED TO ASCERTAIN WHETHER OR NOT THE PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE RELEASED.

Issued on Authority of the Chief of the Land Staff


B-GL-382-004/FP-001

TRAINING

CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT


(ENGLISH)

(Supersedes B-GL-318-018/PT-001 dated 1992-08-24.)

WARNING
ALTHOUGH NOT CLASSIFIED, THIS PUBLICATION, OR ANY PART OF IT, MAY BE EXEMPT FROM DISCLOSURE TO THE
PUBLIC UNDER THE ACCESS TO INFORMATION ACT. ALL ELEMENTS OF INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MUST BE
CLOSELY SCRUTINIZED TO ASCERTAIN WHETHER OR NOT THE PUBLICATION OR ANY PART OF IT MAY BE RELEASED.

Issued on Authority of the Chief of the Land Staff

OPI: DAT 2007-02-03


Close Quarter Combat

WARNING
USE OF THIS MANUAL

1. The techniques in this manual are basic techniques for most close combat fighting.
Instructors shall teach the techniques in this manual rather than their own individual styles.

2. Techniques in this manual can cause serious injury or death. Training of these techniques
will be conducted in strict accordance with approved basic level, unit level and instructor level
training plans.

3. Throughout this manual the term opponent refers to any enemy, belligerent, subject or
person opposing the soldier.

i
Close Quarter Combat

FOREWORD

GENERAL

1. B-GL-382-004/FP-001 Close Quarter Combat is issued on the authority of the Chief of


Defence Staff.

2. This publication, dated 2007-02-03, is effective upon receipt and supersedes


B–GL–318–018/PT–001 Close Quarter Combat change 2 dated 1992-08-24.

3. The NDID for the French version of this publication is B–GL–382–004/FP–002.

4. Any loss or suspected compromise of this publication, or portions thereof, must be


reported in accordance with A-SJ-100-001/AS-000 Security Orders for the Department of
National Defence and the Canadian Forces, Chapter 34.

SCOPE

5. This manual covers basic close quarter combat fighting, bayonet fighting, and use of
force training.

6. This publication is the sole reference for close quarter combat training in the Army. As
such, it is intended for the use of qualified Close Quarter Combat Instructors.

CHANGES

7. Comments and suggestions for changes should be forwarded through the usual channels
to DAT.

© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, as represented by the


Minister of National Defence, 2007.

iii
Close Quarter Combat

RECORD OF CHANGES

Identification of Change
Date Entered Signature
Change No Date

v
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Identification of Change
Date Entered Signature
Change No Date

vi B-GL-382-004/FP-000
Close Quarter Combat

TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD……..................................................................................................................... iii
RECORD OF CHANGES.......................................................................................................... v
CHAPTER 1 PRINCIPLES OF CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT
SECTION 2 CONTINUUM OF FORCE ...........................................................................1
SECTION 3 EFFECTS OF COMBAT STRESS................................................................4
CHAPTER 2 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT
SECTION 1 CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT RANGE BANDS ......................................11
SECTION 2 VULNERABLE POINTS OF THE BODY .................................................11
SECTION 3 PRESSURE POINTS OF THE BODY ........................................................13
SECTION 4 STRIKING SURFACES ..............................................................................17
SECTION 5 CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT STANCES ................................................22
SECTION 6 BASIC MOVEMENT ..................................................................................24
CHAPTER 3 THROWS, TAKEDOWNS AND BREAKFALLS
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................29
SECTION 2 THROWS .....................................................................................................30
Hip Throw ............................................................................................................................30
Shoulder Throw....................................................................................................................33
Turning Throw .....................................................................................................................36
Leg Sweep ............................................................................................................................38
SECTION 3 TAKEDOWNS.............................................................................................42
Head Tear Down ..................................................................................................................42
Compression Takedown .......................................................................................................45
Double Leg Takedown .........................................................................................................47
Single Leg Takedown...........................................................................................................49
Leg Hook Takedown............................................................................................................50
Rear Takedown ....................................................................................................................52
SECTION 4 COUNTERS TO THROWS/TAKEDOWNS ..............................................54
SECTION 5 BREAKFALLS ............................................................................................54
SECTION 6 REAR BREAKFALLS ................................................................................55

vii
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Lying ....................................................................................................................................55
Sitting ...................................................................................................................................57
Squatting...............................................................................................................................58
Standing................................................................................................................................60
SECTION 7 FRONT BREAKFALLS ..............................................................................61
Kneeling ...............................................................................................................................61
Squatting...............................................................................................................................62
Standing................................................................................................................................63
Forward Rolls.......................................................................................................................64
SECTION 8 SIDE BREAKFALLS ..................................................................................65
Lying ....................................................................................................................................65
Squatting...............................................................................................................................66
Standing................................................................................................................................67
CHAPTER 4 STRIKING TECHNIQUES AND COUNTERS
SECTION 1 LONG RANGE STRIKING TECHNIQUES ..............................................71
Kicking Theory ....................................................................................................................71
Balance .................................................................................................................................72
Methods of Delivery.............................................................................................................72
Chambering the Leg .............................................................................................................72
Snap Kick .............................................................................................................................72
Roundhouse Kick .................................................................................................................78
Thrust Kicks .........................................................................................................................80
Front Thrust Kick .................................................................................................................80
Side Thrust Kick...................................................................................................................82
Back Kick .............................................................................................................................84
SECTION 2 MID-RANGE STRIKING TECHNIQUES .................................................86
Punches.................................................................................................................................88
Straight Punch ......................................................................................................................88
Reverse Punch ......................................................................................................................90
Lunge Punch.........................................................................................................................93
Heel Palm Strikes .................................................................................................................95

viii
Hammer Fist .........................................................................................................................96
Knife Hand/Ridgehand.........................................................................................................98
SECTION 3 CLOSE RANGE TECHNIQUES ..............................................................100
Head Butt............................................................................................................................100
Uppercut .............................................................................................................................100
Hook ...................................................................................................................................102
Eye Gouge ..........................................................................................................................103
Elbow Strikes .....................................................................................................................104
Vertical Elbow Strikes .......................................................................................................104
Horizontal Elbow Strikes ...................................................................................................107
Knee Strikes .......................................................................................................................108
Forward Knee Strike ..........................................................................................................109
Horizontal Knee Strike.......................................................................................................110
Stomp Kick.........................................................................................................................111
SECTION 4 DEFENSIVE AND COUNTER-ATTACK TECHNIQUES .....................111
Closing the Distance...........................................................................................................112
Lead and Rear Hand Parries...............................................................................................112
Hook Block ........................................................................................................................114
High Guard.........................................................................................................................115
Lower Block.......................................................................................................................116
Leg Block ...........................................................................................................................117
Double High Blocks ...........................................................................................................118
Defence Against Head Butts ..............................................................................................121
CHAPTER 5 CHOKES AND COUNTERS TO COMMON
ATTACKS/CHOKES
SECTION 1 CHOKES..................................................................................................123
Air Choke ...........................................................................................................................123
Blood Choke.......................................................................................................................123
Grips ...................................................................................................................................124
Front Choke........................................................................................................................125
Cross Collar Choke ............................................................................................................126
Trachea Choke....................................................................................................................127
Rear Chokes .......................................................................................................................128

ix
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Rear Choke 1......................................................................................................................129


Rear Choke 2......................................................................................................................130
Rear Choke 3 .....................................................................................................................131
Side Choke .........................................................................................................................132
Guillotine Choke ................................................................................................................135
SECTION 2 COUNTERS TO COMMON ATTACKS..................................................137
Follow-up Techniques........................................................................................................137
Headlocks ...........................................................................................................................138
Side Head Lock ..................................................................................................................138
Side Headlock With Punching ...........................................................................................142
Front Headlock...................................................................................................................146
Bear Hugs ...........................................................................................................................148
Overhand Rear Bear Hug ...................................................................................................148
Underhand Rear Bear Hug .................................................................................................151
Front Overhand Bear Hug ..................................................................................................154
Front Under Hand Bear Hug ..............................................................................................155
Full Nelson .........................................................................................................................157
Counters to Full Nelson......................................................................................................158
Counters to Wrist Grabs .....................................................................................................159
One-Handed Wrist Grab.....................................................................................................159
Low Two-Handed Wrist Grab............................................................................................160
High Two-Handed Wrist Grab ...........................................................................................162
SECTION 3 COUNTERS TO CHOKES .......................................................................163
Counters to Rear Chokes....................................................................................................163
Counter to Front Chokes or Grabs .....................................................................................170
Counter to Front Chokes or Grabs—One Hand .................................................................170
Counter to Front Chokes—Two Hands..............................................................................171
Counter to a Two Hand or Cross Collar Choke .................................................................172
CHAPTER 6 NON-LETHAL TECHNIQUES
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................175
SECTION 2 LEVEL 1 COMPLIANT ............................................................................176
SECTION 3 LEVEL 2 PASSIVE RESISTANT ............................................................177
Escort Position....................................................................................................................177

x
Head Control Position ........................................................................................................178
SECTION 4 LEVEL 3 ACTIVE RESISTANT ..............................................................179
Compliance Techniques .....................................................................................................180
Wristlocks...........................................................................................................................181
Basic Wristlock ..................................................................................................................181
Reverse Wristlock ..............................................................................................................182
Escort Position Resistance .................................................................................................183
Come-Along Wristlock ......................................................................................................184
Straight-Arm Bar Takedown ..............................................................................................189
Non-Lethal Restraint Techniques.......................................................................................191
Handcuff Grip ....................................................................................................................192
Standing Handcuffing ........................................................................................................194
Kneeling Handcuffing ........................................................................................................197
Prone Handcuffing .............................................................................................................198
Rear Control Position .........................................................................................................201
Flexi-Cuffs .........................................................................................................................202
Standing and Escorting a Restrained Opponent .................................................................204
Restraint Removal ..............................................................................................................205
Soft Hand Striking Techniques ..........................................................................................206
Non-Lethal Chemical Weapons .........................................................................................206
SECTION 5 LEVEL 4 ASSAULT .................................................................................207
Defensive Techniques ........................................................................................................207
Striking Techniques............................................................................................................207
Enhanced Pain Compliance Techniques ............................................................................208
Basic Wristlock Takedown ................................................................................................208
Reverse Wristlock Takedown ............................................................................................211
Side Choke .........................................................................................................................213
Iron Wristlock Takedown...................................................................................................214
Finger Lock Takedown ......................................................................................................214
Non-Lethal Chemical Weapons .........................................................................................215
Agent Characteristics .........................................................................................................216
Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) Spray........................................................................................216
Non-Lethal Impact Weapons .............................................................................................220

xi
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Augmented Rear Arm Bar..................................................................................................223


SECTION 6 LEVEL 5 DEADLY FORCE ASSAULT ..................................................225
CHAPTER 7 EDGED AND IMPACT WEAPON TECHNIQUES
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................227
Angles of Attack.................................................................................................................227
SECTION 2 FUNDAMENTALS OF KNIFE FIGHTING ............................................228
SECTION 3 KNIFE FIGHTING TECHNIQUES ..........................................................232
Slashing Techniques...........................................................................................................232
Vertical Slashing Technique ..............................................................................................232
Outside Slashing Techniques .............................................................................................233
Inside Slashing Techniques ................................................................................................235
Thrusting Techniques.........................................................................................................237
Forward Thrust ...................................................................................................................237
Reverse Thrust....................................................................................................................238
SECTION 4 FUNDAMENTALS OF IMPACT WEAPONS.........................................240
SECTION 5 IMPACT WEAPON TECHNIQUES.........................................................241
Strikes.................................................................................................................................241
Overhand Strike..................................................................................................................241
Underhand Strike................................................................................................................244
Outside Strike .....................................................................................................................246
Inside Strike........................................................................................................................248
Forward Thrust ...................................................................................................................250
Forward Two-Hand Thrust.................................................................................................252
SECTION 6 BLOCKING TECHNIQUES .....................................................................253
Upper Block .......................................................................................................................253
Low Block ..........................................................................................................................254
Middle Block......................................................................................................................255
SECTION 7 DEFENCE AGAINST WEAPONS ...........................................................255
Defence Against Overhead Strike ......................................................................................256
Counter to Forward Thrust .................................................................................................259
Counter to an Inside Slash..................................................................................................260
Counter to an Under Hand Attack......................................................................................262
Counter to Outside Slash....................................................................................................264

xii
Defence Against Knife Held to the Throat—Front ............................................................266
Defence Against Knife Held to the Throat—Rear .............................................................269
Defence Against Impact Weapons .....................................................................................271
Defence Against Firearms ..................................................................................................271
Defence Against Pistols .....................................................................................................272
Defence Against Rifles.......................................................................................................274
Rifle to the Front ................................................................................................................274
Rifle to the Rear .................................................................................................................277
SECTION 8 WEAPON RETENTION TECHNIQUES .................................................280
Rifle Hand Guard Grab ......................................................................................................280
Rifle Muzzle or Hand Guard Grab .....................................................................................282
Butt Strokes ........................................................................................................................283
Off-Balance Techniques.....................................................................................................285
Holstered Pistol With Opponent to the Front.....................................................................287
Holstered Pistol With Opponent to the Rear ......................................................................288
Drawn Pistol to the Front ...................................................................................................290
SECTION 9 IMPROVISED WEAPONS .......................................................................291
CHAPTER 8 SENTRY REMOVAL
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................293
SECTION 2 SENTRY REMOVAL WITH A KNIFE ...................................................294
The Throat ..........................................................................................................................294
Subclavian Artery...............................................................................................................296
The Kidney.........................................................................................................................298
SECTION 3 SENTRY REMOVAL WITH A GARROTTE ..........................................298
Garrotte from the Rear .......................................................................................................298
Garrotte to the Front ...........................................................................................................300
SECTION 4 NECK BREAKS ........................................................................................303
Helmet Neck Break ............................................................................................................303
Helmet Smash ....................................................................................................................304
Neck Break from Rear........................................................................................................306
Neck Break Kneeling Opponent ........................................................................................309
SECTION 5 TAKEDOWNS...........................................................................................311
Rear Takedown ..................................................................................................................311

xiii
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Crotch Takedown ...............................................................................................................312


SECTION 6 CHOKES ....................................................................................................313
CHAPTER 9 RIFLE BAYONET FIGHTING TECHNIQUES
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................313
SECTION 2 BAYONET TECHNIQUES.......................................................................313
Rest.....................................................................................................................................313
On Guard ............................................................................................................................314
Thrust .................................................................................................................................315
Left and Right Parry...........................................................................................................315
Horizontal Butt Stroke .......................................................................................................318
Vertical Butt Stroke............................................................................................................320
Smash .................................................................................................................................321
Slash ...................................................................................................................................321
Ground Point ......................................................................................................................323
High Block .........................................................................................................................325
Low Block ..........................................................................................................................326
Middle Block......................................................................................................................326
Combinations .....................................................................................................................328
Multiple Opponents............................................................................................................328
Offensive Strategy..............................................................................................................329
Defensive Strategy .............................................................................................................330
SECTION 3 BAYONET TRAINING ............................................................................331
Bayonet Obstacle Courses..................................................................................................332
Bayonet Targets..................................................................................................................332
Conduct of Bayonet Obstacle Courses...............................................................................334
SECTION 4 PUGIL STICK TRAINING .......................................................................335
Pugil Training Safety .........................................................................................................335
Safety Equipment ...............................................................................................................336
Safety Personnel .................................................................................................................337
General Conduct.................................................................................................................337
Safety Inspection and Kit Issue..........................................................................................338
Briefing...............................................................................................................................338
Warm-Up............................................................................................................................338

xiv
Review................................................................................................................................338
Pugil Stick Drills ................................................................................................................338
Pugil Bouts .........................................................................................................................339
Instructor Supervision ........................................................................................................341
Second Impact Syndrome...................................................................................................341
Pugil Stick Construction.....................................................................................................342
CHAPTER 10 GROUND FIGHTING
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................345
SECTION 2 GROUND FIGHTING POSITIONS .........................................................345
Mount Position ...................................................................................................................345
Guard Position....................................................................................................................346
Cross Mount .......................................................................................................................346
Side Mount .........................................................................................................................347
SECTION 3 DEFENSIVE GROUND FIGHTING ........................................................348
Mount Reversal ..................................................................................................................349
Guard Reversal...................................................................................................................351
Reversal from Cross-Mount ...............................................................................................352
Escaping the Guard ............................................................................................................355
SECTION 4 OFFENSIVE GROUND FIGHTING TECHNIQUES ..............................357
Armbar from Top Mount....................................................................................................357
Counter to a Front Armbar .................................................................................................362
Armbars from the Guard ....................................................................................................362
Straight Armbar..................................................................................................................366
Figure 4 Armbar .................................................................................................................368
Shoulder Rip.......................................................................................................................369
SECTION 5 GROUND FIGHTING CHOKES ..............................................................370
Rear Chokes .......................................................................................................................370
Ground Fighting Side Choke..............................................................................................371
Cross Collar Chokes...........................................................................................................373
SECTION 6 GROUND COUNTER TECHNIQUES.....................................................375
Counter To Rear Choke (Attempted) .................................................................................375
Counter To Rear Choke (Applied) .....................................................................................376
SECTION 7 GROUND COUNTERS TO COMMON ATTACKS ...............................378

xv
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Side Headlock from the Knees...........................................................................................379


Recovering from a Ground Position...................................................................................382
Defensive Ground Position ................................................................................................383
CHAPTER 11 TRAINING TECHNIQUES
SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................385
SECTION 2 INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNIQUE ............................................................385
Instructor Responsibilities..................................................................................................385
Training Safety ...................................................................................................................386
Training Areas....................................................................................................................387
Training Methodology........................................................................................................388
Stages of Practice ...............................................................................................................388
Conduct of Training ...........................................................................................................389
Conduct of Warm-up and Cool Down Exercises ...............................................................389
Body Hardening Exercises .................................................................................................390
SECTION 3 PROTECTIVE TRAINING EQUIPMENT ...............................................394
SECTION 4 SPARRING ................................................................................................396
Protective Suit Training .....................................................................................................397
Multiple Opponents............................................................................................................398
Training Drills ....................................................................................................................399
Tactical Positioning............................................................................................................399

xvi
Close Quarter Combat

TABLE OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Body Side, Front and Back ........................................................................................13
Figure 2-2: Pressure Points of the Body .......................................................................................17
Figure 2-3: Making a Fist .............................................................................................................18
Figure 2-4: Striking Surface of the Fist ........................................................................................18
Figure 2-5: Back Fist ....................................................................................................................19
Figure 2-6: Hammer Fist...............................................................................................................19
Figure 2-7: Knife Hand.................................................................................................................20
Figure 2-8: Ridge Hand ................................................................................................................20
Figure 2-9: Ball and Toe of the Foot ............................................................................................21
Figure 2-10: Instep Strike .............................................................................................................22
Figure 2-11: Natural Stance ..........................................................................................................23
Figure 2-12: Fighting Stance ........................................................................................................24
Figure 2-13: Directions of Movement ..........................................................................................25
Figure 2-14: Forward Shift—Start Point ......................................................................................26
Figure 2-15: Forward Shift—Mid-point .......................................................................................26
Figure 2-16: Forward Shift—Finish .............................................................................................27
Figure 2-17: Turn to the Rear—Start............................................................................................27
Figure 2-18: Turn to the Rear—Mid-point ...................................................................................28
Figure 2-19: Turn to the Rear—Finish .........................................................................................28
Figure 3-1: Directions for Balance Displacement ........................................................................30
Figure 3-2: Hip Throw Step 1.......................................................................................................31
Figure 3-3: Hip Throw—Foot Position.........................................................................................32
Figure 3-4: Hip Throw Step 2.......................................................................................................32
Figure 3-5: Hip Throw Step 3.......................................................................................................33
Figure 3-6: Hip Throw Step 4.......................................................................................................33
Figure 3-7: Shoulder Throw Step 1 ..............................................................................................34
Figure 3-8: Shoulder Throw Step 2 ..............................................................................................35
Figure 3-9: Shoulder Throw Step 3 ..............................................................................................35
Figure 3-10: Shoulder Throw Step 4 ............................................................................................36
Figure 3-11: Turning Throw Step 1 ..............................................................................................37
Figure 3-12: Turning Throw Step 2 ..............................................................................................37
Figure 3-13: Turning Throw Step 3 ..............................................................................................38
Figure 3-14: Turning Throw Step 4 ..............................................................................................38
Figure 3-15: Leg Sweep Step 1.....................................................................................................39
Figure 3-16: Leg Sweep Step 2.....................................................................................................40
Figure 3-17: Leg Sweep Step 3.....................................................................................................41
Figure 3-18: Leg Sweep Step 4.....................................................................................................41
Figure 3-19: Leg Sweep Step 5.....................................................................................................42
Figure 3-20: Head Tear Down—Occipital Strike Step 1..............................................................43
Figure 3-21: Head Tear Down Step 2 ...........................................................................................43
Figure 3-22: Head Tear Down Step 3 ...........................................................................................44
Figure 3-23: Ocular Grip—Thumb...............................................................................................44
Figure 3-24: Ocular Grip—Fingers ..............................................................................................45
Figure 3-25: Compression—Takedown........................................................................................46

xvii
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 3-26: Compression—Takedown Step 1.............................................................................46


Figure 3-27: Compression—Takedown Step 2.............................................................................47
Figure 3-28: Compression—Takedown Step 3.............................................................................47
Figure 3-29: Double Leg Takedown.............................................................................................48
Figure 3-30: Double Leg Takedown—Step1................................................................................48
Figure 3-31: Double Leg Takedown—Step 2...............................................................................49
Figure 3-32: Single Leg Takedown ..............................................................................................50
Figure 3-33: Single Leg Takedown ..............................................................................................50
Figure 3-34: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 1..................................................................................51
Figure 3-35: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 2..................................................................................52
Figure 3-36: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 3..................................................................................52
Figure 3-37: Rear Takedown—Step 1 ..........................................................................................53
Figure 3-38: Rear Takedown—Step 2 ..........................................................................................54
Figure 3-39: Rear Breakfall Lying—Step 1..................................................................................56
Figure 3-40: Rear Breakfall Lying—Step 2..................................................................................56
Figure 3-41: Back Breakfall Lying—Step 3.................................................................................57
Figure 3-42: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 1................................................................................57
Figure 3-43: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 2................................................................................58
Figure 3-44: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 3................................................................................58
Figure 3-45: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 1 ...........................................................................59
Figure 3-46: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 2 ...........................................................................59
Figure 3-47: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 3 ...........................................................................60
Figure 3-48: Back Breakfall Standing—Step 1 ............................................................................60
Figure 3-49: Back Breakfall Standing—Step 2 ............................................................................61
Figure 3-50: Front Breakfall Kneeling—Step 1 ...........................................................................62
Figure 3-51: Front Breakfall Kneeling—Step 2 ...........................................................................62
Figure 3-52: Front Breakfall Squatting—Step 1...........................................................................63
Figure 3-53: Front Breakfall Squatting—Step 2...........................................................................63
Figure 3-54: Front Breakfall Standing—Step 1............................................................................64
Figure 3-55: Front Breakfall Standing—Step 2............................................................................64
Figure 3-56: Side Breakfall Lying—Step 1 ..................................................................................65
Figure 3-57: Side Breakfall Lying—Step 2 ..................................................................................66
Figure 3-58: Side Breakfall Squatting—Start...............................................................................66
Figure 3-59: Side Breakfall Squatting—Strike.............................................................................67
Figure 3-60: Side Breakfall Squatting—Finish ............................................................................67
Figure 3-61: Side—Breakfall Standing—Start..............................................................................68
Figure 3-62: Side—Breakfall Standing—Mid-point ....................................................................68
Figure 3-63: Side—Breakfall Standing—Finish ..........................................................................69
Figure 4-11: Roundhouse Kick.....................................................................................................79
Figure 4-12: Roundhouse Kick—Step 1.......................................................................................79
Figure 4-13: Roundhouse Kick—Step 2.......................................................................................80
Figure 4-14: Front Thrust Kick—Step 1.......................................................................................81
Figure 4-15: Front Thrust Kick—Step 2.......................................................................................81
Figure 4-16: Front Thrust Kick—Step 3.......................................................................................82
Figure 4-21: Side Thrust Kick—Step 4 ........................................................................................84
Figure 4-26: Power Generation.....................................................................................................87

xviii
Figure 4-28: Straight Punch—Step 2............................................................................................89
Figure 4-29: Straight Punch—Step 3............................................................................................90
Figure 4-30: Straight Punch—Step 4............................................................................................90
Figure 4-31: Reverse Punch—Step 1............................................................................................91
Figure 4-32: Reverse Punch—Step 2............................................................................................91
Figure 4-33: Reverse Punch—Step 3............................................................................................92
Figure 4-34: Reverse Punch—Step 4............................................................................................92
Figure 4-35: Lunge Punch—Step 1 ..............................................................................................93
Figure 4-36: Lunge Punch—Step 2 ..............................................................................................94
Figure 4-37: Lunge Punch—Step 3 ..............................................................................................94
Figure 4-38: Lunge Punch—Step 4 ..............................................................................................95
Figure 4-39: Heel Palm Strike ......................................................................................................96
Figure 4-40: Heel Palm Strike ......................................................................................................96
Figure 4-41: Hammer Fist.............................................................................................................97
Figure 4-42: Hammer Fist.............................................................................................................98
Figure 4-43: Outside Knife Hand .................................................................................................99
Figure 4-44: Outside Ridge Hand .................................................................................................99
Figure 4-45: Downward Knife Hand ..........................................................................................100
Figure 4-46: Upper Cut—Step 1.................................................................................................101
Figure 4-47: Upper Cut—Step 2.................................................................................................101
Figure 4-48: Upper Cut—Step 3.................................................................................................102
Figure 4-49: Hook Punch—Step 1..............................................................................................103
Figure 4-50: Hook Punch—Step 2..............................................................................................103
Figure 4-51: Eye Gouge..............................................................................................................104
Figure 4-52: Vertical Elbow—Strike Upward............................................................................105
Figure 4-53: Vertical Elbow—Strike Downward .......................................................................106
Figure 4-54: Vertical Elbow—Strike Rearward .........................................................................106
Figure 4-55: Vertical Elbow Strike—Rear Upward ...................................................................107
Figure 4-56: Horizontal Elbow—Strike Forward .......................................................................108
Figure 4-57: Horizontal Elbow—Strike Rearward .....................................................................108
Figure 4-58: Knee Strike to the Head—Step 1 ...........................................................................109
Figure 4-59: Knee Strike to the Head—Step 2 ...........................................................................110
Figure 4-60: Horizontal Knee Strike...........................................................................................110
Figure 4-61: Stomp Kick ............................................................................................................111
Figure 4-62: Inside Lead Hand Parry..........................................................................................113
Figure 4-63: Inside Rear Hand Parry ..........................................................................................113
Figure 4-64: Outside Lead Hand Parry.......................................................................................114
Figure 4-65: Outside Rear Hand Parry .......................................................................................114
Figure 4-66: Hook Block—(Front View) ...................................................................................115
Figure 4-67: Hook Block—(Side View).....................................................................................115
Figure 4-68: High Guard.............................................................................................................116
Figure 4-69: Lower Block...........................................................................................................117
Figure 4-70: Leg Block...............................................................................................................117
Figure 4-71: Double High Block 1 .............................................................................................118
Figure 4-72: Double High Block 1 .............................................................................................119
Figure 4-73: Double High Block 2 .............................................................................................119

xix
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 4-74: Double High Block 2 .............................................................................................120


Figure 4-75: Double High Block 3 .............................................................................................120
Figure 4-76: Double High Block 3 .............................................................................................121
Figure 5-1: Four-finger Grip.......................................................................................................124
Figure 5-2: Three-finger Grip—Version 1 .................................................................................125
Figure 5-3: Three-finger Grip—Version 2 .................................................................................125
Figure 5-4: Front Choke..............................................................................................................126
Figure 5-5: Cross Collar Choke—Step 1 ....................................................................................126
Figure 5-6: Cross Collar Choke—Step 2 ....................................................................................127
Figure 5-7: Cross Collar Choke—Step 3 ....................................................................................127
Figure 5-8: Trachea Choke .........................................................................................................128
Figure 5-9: Trachea Choke Alternate Grip .................................................................................128
Figure 5-10: Rear Choke 1—Step 1............................................................................................129
Figure 5-11: Rear Choke 1—Step 2............................................................................................129
Figure 5-12: Rear Choke 1—Side View.....................................................................................130
Figure 5-13: Rear Choke 2—Step 1............................................................................................130
Figure 5-14: Rear Choke 2—Step 2............................................................................................131
Figure 5-15: Rear Choke 3—Step 1............................................................................................131
Figure 5-16: Rear Choke 3—Step 2............................................................................................132
Figure 5-17: Side Choke—Step 1 ...............................................................................................133
Figure 5-18: Side Choke—Step 2 ...............................................................................................134
Figure 5-19: Side Choke—Step 3 ...............................................................................................134
Figure 5-20: Side Choke—Step 4 ...............................................................................................135
Figure 5-21: Guillotine Choke—Step 1......................................................................................136
Figure 5-22: Guillotine Choke—Step 2......................................................................................136
Figure 5-23: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 1 ........................................................................138
Figure 5-24: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 2 ........................................................................139
Figure 5-25: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 3 ........................................................................139
Figure 5-26: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 4 ........................................................................140
Figure 5-27: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 5 ........................................................................140
Figure 5-28: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 6 ........................................................................141
Figure 5-29: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 7 ........................................................................141
Figure 5-30: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 8 ........................................................................142
Figure 5-31: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 1 ........................................................142
Figure 5-32: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 2 ........................................................143
Figure 5-33: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 3 ........................................................143
Figure 5-34: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 4 ........................................................144
Figure 5-35: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 5 ........................................................144
Figure 5-36: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 6 ........................................................145
Figure 5-37: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 7 ........................................................145
Figure 6-1: Escort Position .........................................................................................................178
Figure 6-2: Head Control Position..............................................................................................179
Figure 6-3: Head Control Position..............................................................................................179
Figure 6-4: Basic Wristlock ........................................................................................................182
Figure 6-5: Basic Wristlock ........................................................................................................182
Figure 6-6: Reverse Wristlock ....................................................................................................183

xx
Figure 6-7: Reverse Wristlock ....................................................................................................183
Figure 6-8: Come-along Wristlock .............................................................................................184
Figure 6-9: Come-along Wristlock .............................................................................................184
Figure 6-10: Come-along Wristlock ...........................................................................................185
Figure 6-11: Come-along Wristlock ...........................................................................................185
Figure 6-12: Come-along Wristlock ...........................................................................................186
Figure 6-13: Come-along Wristlock ...........................................................................................186
Figure 6-14: Basic to Come-along Wristlock .............................................................................187
Figure 6-15: Basic to Come-along Wristlock .............................................................................187
Figure 6-16: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock .........................................................................188
Figure 6-17: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock .........................................................................188
Figure 6-18: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock .........................................................................189
Figure 6-19: Straight-arm Bar Takedown...................................................................................190
Figure 6-20: Straight-arm Bar Takedown...................................................................................190
Figure 6-21: Straight-arm Bar Takedown...................................................................................191
Figure 6-22: Straight-arm Bar Takedown...................................................................................191
Figure 6-23: Handcuff Grip ........................................................................................................193
Figure 6-24: Handcuff Grip (modified) ......................................................................................193
Figure 6-25: Standing Handcuffing ............................................................................................195
Figure 6-26: Standing Handcuffing ............................................................................................195
Figure 6-27: Standing Handcuffing ............................................................................................196
Figure 6-28: Standing Handcuffing ............................................................................................196
Figure 6-29: Standing Handcuffing ............................................................................................197
Figure 6-30: Kneeling Handcuffing Position 1...........................................................................197
Figure 6-31: Kneeling Handcuffing Position 2...........................................................................198
Figure 6-32: Prone Handcuffing .................................................................................................199
Figure 6-33: Prone Handcuffing .................................................................................................199
Figure 6-34: Prone Handcuffing .................................................................................................200
Figure 6-35: Prone Handcuffing .................................................................................................200
Figure 6-36: Rear Control Position.............................................................................................201
Figure 6-37: Rear Control Position (modified)...........................................................................202
Figure 6-38: Flexi-cuff Position..................................................................................................203
Figure 6-39: Applying Flexi-cuffs ..............................................................................................203
Figure 6-40: Applying Flexi-cuffs ..............................................................................................204
Figure 6-41: Applying Flexi-cuffs ..............................................................................................204
Figure 6-42: Handcuff Escort Position .......................................................................................205
Figure 6-43: Keyhole Up ............................................................................................................206
Figure 6-44: Keyhole Down .......................................................................................................206
Figure 6-45: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................209
Figure 6-46: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................209
Figure 6-47: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................210
Figure 6-48: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................210
Figure 6-49: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................210
Figure 6-50: Basic Wristlock Takedown ....................................................................................211
Figure 6-51: Reverse Wristlock Takedown ................................................................................212
Figure 6-52: Reverse Wristlock Takedown ................................................................................212

xxi
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 6-53: Reverse Wristlock Takedown ................................................................................213


Figure 6-54: Reverse Wristlock Takedown ................................................................................213
Figure 6-55: Iron Wristlock Takedown ......................................................................................214
Figure 6-56: Iron Wristlock Takedown ......................................................................................214
Figure 6-57: Finger Lock Takedown ..........................................................................................215
Figure 6-58: Finger Lock Takedown ..........................................................................................215
Figure 6-59: Peroneal Strike .......................................................................................................221
Figure 6-60: Femoral Strike........................................................................................................221
Figure 6-61: Radial Strike...........................................................................................................222
Figure 6-62: Ulna Strike .............................................................................................................222
Figure 6-63: Augmented Rear Arm Bar .....................................................................................223
Figure 6-64: Augmented Rear Arm Bar .....................................................................................223
Figure 6-65: Augmented Rear Arm Bar .....................................................................................224
Figure 6-66: Augmented Rear Arm Bar .....................................................................................224
Figure 7-1a: Right-handed Soldier—Angles of Attack ..............................................................229
Figure 7-1b: Left handed Soldier—Angles of Attack.................................................................230
Figure 7-2: Hammer Grip ...........................................................................................................231
Figure 7-3: Ice Pick Grip ............................................................................................................232
Figure 7-4: Knife Fighting Stance ..............................................................................................233
Figure 7-5: Vertical Slash ...........................................................................................................235
Figure 7-6: Outside Slash—(Start) .............................................................................................236
Figure 7-7: Outside Slash—(Mid-point).....................................................................................237
Figure 7-8: Outside Slash—(Finish)...........................................................................................237
Figure 7-9: Inside Slash—Start...................................................................................................238
Figure 7-10: Inside Slash—Mid-point ........................................................................................239
Figure 7-11: Inside Slash—Finish ..............................................................................................239
Figure 7-12: Forward Thrust—Step 1.........................................................................................240
Figure 7-13: Forward Thrust—Step 2.........................................................................................241
Figure 7-14: Reverse Thrust—Step 1 .........................................................................................242
Figure 7-15: Reverse Thrust—Step 2 .........................................................................................242
Figure 7-16: One-hand Grip........................................................................................................243
Figure 7-17: Two-hand Grip.......................................................................................................243
Figure 7-18: Stance One-hand Grip............................................................................................244
Figure 7-19: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 1............................................................245
Figure 7-20: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 2............................................................246
Figure 7-21: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 3............................................................246
Figure 7-22: Underhand strike—Step 1......................................................................................247
Figure 7-23: Underhand Strike—Step 2 .....................................................................................248
Figure 7-24: Underhand Strike—Step 3 .....................................................................................248
Figure 7-25: Outside Strike—Step 1...........................................................................................249
Figure 7-26: Outside Strike—Step 2...........................................................................................250
Figure 7-27: Outside Strike—Step 3...........................................................................................250
Figure 7-28: Inside Strike—Step 1 .............................................................................................251
Figure 7-29: Inside Strike—Step 2 .............................................................................................252
Figure 7-30: Inside Strike—Step 3 .............................................................................................252
Figure 7-31: Forward Thrust Angle 5—Step 1...........................................................................253

xxii
Figure 7-32: Forward Thrust Angle 5—Step 2...........................................................................253
Figure 7-33: Forward Thrust Angle 6—Step 1...........................................................................254
Figure 7-34: Forward Thrust Angle 6—Step 2...........................................................................254
Figure 7-35: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 1 .......................................................................255
Figure 7-36: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 2 .......................................................................255
Figure 7-37: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 3 .......................................................................256
Figure 7-38: Upper Block ...........................................................................................................257
Figure 7-39: Low Block..............................................................................................................257
Figure 7-40: Middle Block..........................................................................................................258
Figure 7-41: Angle 10 Attack .....................................................................................................260
Figure 7-42: Two-handed Soft Block .........................................................................................260
Figure 7-43: Counter to Angle Knife Sticks ...............................................................................261
Figure 7-44: Counter to Angle 10—Step 1 Knife Does Not Stick .............................................261
Figure 7-45: Counter to Angle 10—Step 2 Knife Does Not Stick .............................................262
Figure 7-46: Soft Open Hand Block ...........................................................................................262
Figure 7-47: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 1 .............................................................263
Figure 7-48: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 2 .............................................................263
Figure 7-49: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 3 .............................................................263
Figure 7-50: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 1 ............................................................................264
Figure 7-51: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 2 ............................................................................264
Figure 7-52: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 3 ............................................................................265
Figure 7-53: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 4 ............................................................................265
Figure 7-54: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 1 ..................................................................266
Figure 7-55: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 2 ..................................................................266
Figure 7-56: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 3 ..................................................................267
Figure 7-57: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 1 .........................................................................268
Figure 7-58: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 2 .........................................................................268
Figure 7-59: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 3 .........................................................................269
Figure 7-60: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 4 .........................................................................269
Figure 7-61: Knife on Left Side..................................................................................................270
Figure 7-62: Knife on Left Side—Step 1....................................................................................270
Figure 7-63: Knife on Left Side—Step 2....................................................................................270
Figure 7-64: Knife on Left Side—Step 3....................................................................................271
Figure 7-65: Knife on Right Side................................................................................................271
Figure 7-66: Knife on Right Side—Step 1 .................................................................................272
Figure 7-67: Knife on Right Side—Step 2 .................................................................................272
Figure 7-68: Knife From Rear ....................................................................................................273
Figure 7-69: Knife From Rear—Step 1 ......................................................................................273
Figure 7-70: Knife From Rear—Step 2 ......................................................................................273
Figure 7-71: Knife From Rear—Step 3 ......................................................................................274
Figure 7-72: Disarming Pistol—Step 1.......................................................................................275
Figure 7-73: Disarming Pistol—Step 2.......................................................................................276
Figure 7-74: Disarming Pistol—Step 3.......................................................................................276
Figure 7-75: Disarming Pistol—Step 4.......................................................................................277
Figure 7-76: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 1 ............................................................278
Figure 7-77: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 2 ............................................................278

xxiii
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 7-78: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 3 ............................................................279


Figure 7-79: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 4 ............................................................279
Figure 7-80: Disarming Rifle to Front (Outside)........................................................................280
Figure 7-81: Disarming Rifle to Front (Outside)........................................................................280
Figure 7-82: Disarming Rifle to Rear Shoulder Height..............................................................281
Figure 7-83: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Parry).............................................................................281
Figure 7-84: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Elbow Strike) ................................................................282
Figure 7-85: Disarming Rifle to Rear Small of the Back ...........................................................282
Figure 7-86: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Lower Block) ................................................................283
Figure 7-87: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards) ..............................................................................284
Figure 7-88: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards) Step 1 ...................................................................284
Figure 7-89: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards) Step 2 ...................................................................285
Figure 7-90: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards) .................................................................285
Figure 7-91: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards) Step 1 ......................................................286
Figure 7-92: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards) Step 2 ......................................................286
Figure 7-93: Butt Stroke Femoral Nerve ....................................................................................287
Figure 7-94: Butt Stroke Peroneal Nerve....................................................................................287
Figure 7-95: Opponent Pushes Rifle...........................................................................................288
Figure 7-96: Opponent Pushes Rifle...........................................................................................288
Figure 7-97: Opponent Pulls Rifle..............................................................................................289
Figure 7-98: Opponent Pulls Rifle—Step 1................................................................................289
Figure 7-99: Opponent Pulls Rifle—Step 2................................................................................290
Figure 7-100: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol.........................................................................290
Figure 7-101: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol—Step 1...........................................................291
Figure 7-102: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol—Step 2...........................................................291
Figure 7-103: Opponent to the Rear ...........................................................................................292
Figure 7-104: Opponent to the Rear—Step 1 .............................................................................292
Figure 7-105: Opponent to the Rear—Step 2 .............................................................................293
Figure 7-106: Pistol to the Front.................................................................................................293
Figure 7-107: Pistol to the Front—Step 1...................................................................................294
Figure 7-108: Pistol to the Front—Step 2...................................................................................294
Figure 8-1: Close the Distance....................................................................................................295
Figure 8-2: Throat—Step 1.........................................................................................................295
Figure 8-3: Throat—Step 2.........................................................................................................296
Figure 8-4: Subclavian Artery—Step 1 ......................................................................................297
Figure 8-5: Subclavian Artery—Step 2 ......................................................................................297
Figure 8-6: Kidney......................................................................................................................298
Figure 8-7: Stalking the Sentry ...................................................................................................299
Figure 8-8: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 1 ...............................................................................299
Figure 8-9: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 2 ...............................................................................300
Figure 8-10: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 3 .............................................................................300
Figure 8-11: Stalking the Sentry .................................................................................................301
Figure 8-12: Garrotte to the Front—Step 1.................................................................................301
Figure 8-13: Garrotte to the Front—Step 2.................................................................................302
Figure 8-14: Garrotte to the Front—Side View..........................................................................302
Figure 8-15: Helmet Neck Break—Step 1..................................................................................303

xxiv
Figure 8-16: Helmet Neck Break—Step 2..................................................................................304
Figure 8-17: Helmet Neck Break—Step 3..................................................................................304
Figure 8-18: Helmet Smash ........................................................................................................305
Figure 8-19: Helmet Smash—Step 1 ..........................................................................................305
Figure 8-20: Helmet Smash—Step 2 ..........................................................................................306
Figure 8-21: Helmet Smash—Step 3 ..........................................................................................306
Figure 8-22: Neck Break from Rear ...........................................................................................307
Figure 8-23: Neck Break from Rear—Step 1 .............................................................................307
Figure 8-24: Neck Break from Rear—Step 2 .............................................................................308
Figure 8-25: Neck Break from Rear—Step 3 .............................................................................308
Figure 8-26: Stalking the Enemy ................................................................................................309
Figure 8-27: Neck Break Kneeling—Step 1...............................................................................310
Figure 8-28: Neck Break Kneeling—Step 2...............................................................................310
Figure 8-29: Stalking the Sentry .................................................................................................311
Figure 8-30: Rear Takedown—Step 1 ........................................................................................311
Figure 8-31: Rear Takedown—Step 2 ........................................................................................312
Figure 8-32: Crotch Takedown—Step 1.....................................................................................312
Figure 8-33: Crotch Takedown—Step 2.....................................................................................313
Figure 8-34: Crotch Takedown—Step 3.....................................................................................313
Figure 9-1: Rest...........................................................................................................................314
Figure 9-2: On Guard..................................................................................................................315
Figure 9-3: Thrust .......................................................................................................................315
Figure 9-4: On Guard..................................................................................................................316
Figure 9-5: Left Parry .................................................................................................................316
Figure 9-6: Left Parry .................................................................................................................317
Figure 9-7: On Guard..................................................................................................................317
Figure 9-8: Right Parry ...............................................................................................................318
Figure 9-9: Right Parry ...............................................................................................................318
Figure 9-10: Left Parry ...............................................................................................................319
Figure 9-11: Horizontal Butt Stroke ...........................................................................................319
Figure 9-12: On Guard................................................................................................................320
Figure 9-13: Vertical Butt Stroke ...............................................................................................320
Figure 9-14: Smash .....................................................................................................................321
Figure 9-15: Slash (Start)............................................................................................................322
Figure 9-16: Slash (Mid-point) ...................................................................................................322
Figure 9-17: Slash (Finish) .........................................................................................................323
Figure 9-18: Ground Point (Start)...............................................................................................324
Figure 9-19: Ground Point (Mid-point) ......................................................................................324
Figure 9-20: Bayonet Extraction (Finish) ...................................................................................325
Figure 9-21: High Block .............................................................................................................325
Figure 9-22: Low Block..............................................................................................................326
Figure 9-23: Middle Block..........................................................................................................327
Figure 9-24: Middle Block..........................................................................................................327
Figures 9-25: Two against One...................................................................................................329
Figure 9-26: Three against Two—Step 1....................................................................................329
Figure 9-27: Three against Two—Step 2....................................................................................330

xxv
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 9-28: One against Two ....................................................................................................330


Figure 9-29: Two against Three Step 1.......................................................................................331
Figure 9-30: Two against Three Step 2.......................................................................................331
Figure 9-31: Two against Three Step 3.......................................................................................331
Figure 9-32: Scaffold Target.......................................................................................................333
Figure 9-33: Gallows Target.......................................................................................................334
Figure 9-34: Ground Target ........................................................................................................334
Figure 9-35: Pugil Stick Construction and Materials .................................................................343
Figure 9-36: Pugil Stick Construction ........................................................................................344
Figure 10-1: Mount Position.......................................................................................................347
Figure 10-2: Guard Position........................................................................................................348
Figure 10-3: Cross Mount...........................................................................................................348
Figure 10-4: Side Mount.............................................................................................................349
Figure 10-5: Top Mount Reversal—Step 1 ................................................................................350
Figure 10-6 Top Mount Reversal—Step 2...................................................................................350
Figure 10-7 Top Mount Reversal—Step 3...................................................................................350
Figure 10-8: Top Mount Reversal—Step 4 ................................................................................350
Figure 10-9: Top Mount Reversal—Step 5 ................................................................................350
Figure 10-10: Guard Position .....................................................................................................351
Figure 10-11: Guard Reversal—Step 1.......................................................................................352
Figure 10-12: Guard Reversal—Step 2.......................................................................................352
Figure 10-13: Cross-mount Reversal 1—Step 1.........................................................................353
Figure 10-14: Cross-mount Reversal 1—Step 2.........................................................................353
Figure 10-15: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 1.........................................................................354
Figure 10-16: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 2.........................................................................354
Figure 10-17: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 3.........................................................................354
Figure 10-18: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 4.........................................................................355
Figure 10-19: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 1.........................................................................355
Figure 10-20: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 2.........................................................................356
Figure 10-21: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 3.........................................................................356
Figure 10-22: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 4.........................................................................356
Figure 10-23: Guard Pass 1—Step 1 ..........................................................................................357
Figure 10-24: Guard Pass 1—Step 2 ..........................................................................................357
Figure 10-25: Guard Pass 2.........................................................................................................358
Figure 10-26: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 1 ....................................................................359
Figure 10-27: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 2 ....................................................................359
Figure 10-28: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 3 ....................................................................360
Figure 10-29: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 4 ....................................................................360
Figure 10-30: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 1 ....................................................................361
Figure 10-31: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 2 ....................................................................361
Figure 10-32: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 3 ....................................................................362
Figure 10-33: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 4 ....................................................................362
Figure 10-34: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 5 ....................................................................363
Figure 10-35: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 1 ............................................................................364
Figure 10-36: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 2 ............................................................................364
Figure 10-37: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 3 ............................................................................365

xxvi
Figure 10-38: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 4 ............................................................................365
Figure 10-39: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 1 ............................................................................366
Figure 10-40: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 2 ............................................................................366
Figure 10-41: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 3 ............................................................................367
Figure 10-42: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 4 ............................................................................367
Figure 10-43: Straight Armbar—Step 1 .....................................................................................368
Figure 10-44: Straight Armbar—Step 2 .....................................................................................368
Figure 10-45: Straight Armbar—Step 3 .....................................................................................368
Figure 10-46: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1.....................................................................................369
Figure 10-47: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1.....................................................................................369
Figure 10-48: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1.....................................................................................370
Figure 10-49: Shoulder Rip—Step 1 ..........................................................................................370
Figure 10-50: Shoulder Rip—Step 2 ..........................................................................................371
Figure 10-51: Rear Choke on the Ground—Step 1 ....................................................................371
Figure 10-52: Rear Choke on the Ground—Step 2 ....................................................................372
Figure 10-53: Top Mount ...........................................................................................................373
Figure 10-54: Side Choke—Step 1 .............................................................................................373
Figure 10-55: Side Choke—Step 2 .............................................................................................374
Figure 10-56: Cross Collar Choke Fingers in .............................................................................374
Figure 10-57: Cross Collar Choke Thumbs in............................................................................375
Figure 10-58: Cross Collar Choke ..............................................................................................375
Figure 10-59: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 1 ......................................................376
Figure 10-60: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 2 ......................................................376
Figure 10-61: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 3 ......................................................377
Figure 10-62: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 1.............................................................377
Figure 10-63: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 2.............................................................378
Figure 10-64: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 3.............................................................378
Figure 10-65: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 4.............................................................379
Figure 10-66: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 5.............................................................379
Figure 10-67: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 1 ..............................................................380
Figure 10-68: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 2 ..............................................................380
Figure 10-69: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 3 ..............................................................381
Figure 10-70: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 4 ..............................................................381
Figure 10-71: Ground Side Headlock .........................................................................................382
Figure 10-72: Ground Side Headlock—Step 1...........................................................................382
Figure 10-73: Ground Side Headlock—Step 2...........................................................................382
Figure 10-74: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 1 ...................................................383
Figure 10-75: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 2 ...................................................383
Figure 10-76: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 3 ...................................................384
Figure 10-77: Defensive Ground Position 1 ...............................................................................384
Figure 10-78: Defensive Ground Position 2 ...............................................................................385
Figure 11-1: Bridging .................................................................................................................390
Figure 11-2: Sprawl Drill............................................................................................................391
Figure 11-3: Mountain Climbers ................................................................................................391
Figure 11-4: Mountain Climbers ................................................................................................392
Figure 11-5: Iron Cross...............................................................................................................392

xxvii
B-GL-382-004/FP-001

Figure 11-6: Iron Cross...............................................................................................................393


Figure 11-7: Shrimping Drill ......................................................................................................393
Figure 11-8: Shrimping Drill ......................................................................................................394
Figure 11-9: Shrimping Drill ......................................................................................................394
Figure 11-10: Tactical Positioning..............................................................................................400

xxviii
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 1
PRINCIPLES OF CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT

SECTION 1
CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT TACTICAL PRINCIPLES
1. Introduction. Close quarter combat is the physical confrontation between two or more
opponents. It involves armed, unarmed, lethal, and non-lethal fighting techniques that range
from enforced compliance to deadly force. The purpose of close quarter combat is to apply
armed and unarmed techniques to produce lethal and non-lethal results. Unarmed techniques
include hand-to-hand combat and defence against hand-held weapons. Armed techniques
include those applied with a rifle, bayonet, knife, baton or any improvised weapon.

2. Close quarter combat is a weapons-based system that spans the spectrum of conflict.
Close quarter combat techniques both flow from and support the tactical principles listed below.
These principles are not applied separately, but are combined to achieve maximum effect.

a. Decisiveness. Decisiveness is essential in close quarter combat. An indecisive


soldier wastes energy and possibly lives. Whether the intent is to control an
opponent using restraints or defend themselves in war, soldiers must have a clear
purpose before engaging in close quarter combat, and act decisively once
engaged.

b. Speed. Speed is used to gain the initiative over an opponent. In close quarter
combat, the speed and violence of the attack against an opponent provides
soldiers with a distinct advantage. Soldiers must know and understand the basics
of close quarter combat so that they can execute techniques instinctively and
rapidly.

c. Concentration of Force. To achieve maximum power, the strength of all parts of


the body must be used simultaneously. A strike will be ineffective if applied with
the arm or leg alone. Power concentrated at the time of impact must be instantly
released to prepare for the next action. Note that various muscles and tendons
must be kept loose and relaxed to permit instant response to changing
circumstances.

d. Flexibility. Close quarter combat can be characterized by friction, uncertainty,


disorder and rapid change. Every situation is a unique combination of changing
factors that cannot be controlled with precision or certainty. For example, a
soldier dealing with crowd-control will have to employ various techniques
ranging from non-lethal restraints to possibly deadly force. Soldiers must adapt to
situations quickly to maintain their advantage.

e. Simplicity. Close quarter combat is based on instinctive responses. A wide


range of situations have to be handled with the same simple skill sets, as it has
been found that increasing the number of possible responses results in increased
response time. This is because the soldier must decide which response or

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 1
Close Quarter Combat

technique is most appropriate for the threat. While the difference in time may
only be minimal, even a half-second hesitation in a deadly force confrontation
could be fatal.

3. Gaining Advantage. A basic principle of martial arts is to use an opponent’s strength


against him to gain more leverage than one’s own muscles alone can generate, thereby gaining
the advantage. In close quarter combat, soldiers must exploit every advantage over an opponent
to ensure a successful outcome. This can include employing various weapons and techniques to
present a dilemma to the opponent. Achieving surprise can also greatly increase leverage.
Soldiers try to achieve surprise through deception, stealth, and ambiguity.

4. Exploiting Success. Typically, an opponent will not surrender simply because he is


placed at a disadvantage. Soldiers cannot be satisfied with gaining an advantage in close quarter
combat. They must exploit that advantage aggressively and ruthlessly until an opportunity arises
to completely dominate the opponent. Soldiers must exploit success by using every advantage
that can be gained.

SECTION 2
CONTINUUM OF FORCE
5. Soldiers will face both combat and non-combat situations. Threat levels may rise and fall
based on the actions of the soldier and the opponents involved. Escalation of force stops when
the opponent complies with the demands imposed by the soldier. This range of actions is known
as the continuum of force.

6. The continuum of force describes a wide range of possible actions, ranging from verbal
commands to the application of deadly force, which may be used to gain and maintain control of
a potentially dangerous situation. The continuum of force consists of five levels that correspond
to the behaviour of opponents and the actions the soldier uses to control the situation. Close
quarter combat is employed in Levels 3, 4 and 5 of the continuum.

Continuum of Force
Level Level of Resistance Level of Control
1 Compliant Verbal commands
2 Passive Resistant Contact controls
3 Active Resistant Compliance Techniques
4 Assault Defensive Tactics
5 Deadly Force Assault Deadly Force
Note: bold text indicates levels where close quarter combat is employed.

2 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Principles of Close Quarter Combat

a. Level 1—Compliant. The opponent complies with verbal commands. Close


quarter combat is not necessary.

b. Level 2—Passive Resistant. The opponent resists verbal commands but


complies immediately with any contact controls. Close quarter combat is not
employed.

c. Level 3—Active Resistant. The opponent initially demonstrates physical


resistance. Soldiers use compliance techniques to control the situation. Level 3
employs close quarter combat to physically force an opponent to comply.
Techniques include:

(1) compliance techniques;

(2) soft-hand striking techniques; and

(3) non-lethal chemical weapons (if ordered).

d. Level 4—Assault. The opponent may physically attack soldiers, but does not use
a weapon. Soldiers employ close quarter combat to neutralize the threat,
including:

(1) defensive techniques (blocks & counters);

(2) striking techniques;

(3) enhanced pain compliance techniques;

(4) non-lethal chemical weapons; and

(5) impact weapon techniques.

e. Level 5—Deadly Force Assault. The opponent usually has a weapon, and will
either kill or seriously injure someone if not stopped immediately and brought
under control. To control the opponent soldiers typically apply deadly force using
small arms weapons, but may also employ armed and unarmed close quarter
combat.

7. Principles for Controlling Resistance. In use of force situations the soldier is


responsible for the level of force employed. The following principles describe legally acceptable
methods for controlling an opponent who resists.

a. Pain Compliance. Pain compliance uses pain to control resistive behaviour.


Pain is a formidable tool for disrupting an opponent’s thought process. Once the
pain exceeds the opponent’s pain threshold he usually decides to stop resisting.
Examples of pain compliance techniques are joint locks and pressure points.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 3
Close Quarter Combat

b. Stunning Techniques. Stunning employs overwhelming sensory input that is


sudden, intense and unexpected. The stun can result from heavy impact, hitting
the ground, or being struck on certain areas of the anatomy. The average stun will
average 3 to 7 seconds, and allows the soldier sufficient time for a follow-up
strike. Examples of stunning techniques are the brachial stun, radial stun,
suprascapular stun, and roundhouse kicks to the peroneal or femoral nerve motor
points.

c. Distraction Techniques. Distraction techniques weaken motor action by


changing the thought process. A distraction technique could be as simple as a
shin scrape, a knee to the femoral nerve, a straight punch to set up a reverse
punch, or just asking a question that requires more than a yes or no answer. The
average distraction technique lasts about 3 seconds.

d. Balance Displacement. Balance displacement uses leverage, moving an


opponent’s centre of gravity beyond the stability provided by his feet. An
example of balance displacement is any form of takedown.

e. Motor Dysfunction. Motor dysfunction is a controlled striking technique which


over-stimulates motor nerves, resulting in temporary muscle impairment. Motor
dysfunction targets an area which is a large muscle mass, and may be applied by
feet or hand strikes, or impact weapons such as a baton or rifle butt. The average
motor dysfunction may last from 30 seconds to several minutes.

SECTION 3
EFFECTS OF COMBAT STRESS
8. Stress can cause involuntary physiological responses, and thus in life and death situations
combat stress can have a significant diminishing effect on task performance. Combat stress can
impact what a soldier thinks (irrational thoughts), what he sees (tunnel vision and loss of near
vision), what he hears (auditory exclusion), how he responds (loss of motor skills), and can even
have an effect on how he bleeds (vasoconstriction). These stress reactions can never be negated,
however proper training and preparation can reduce their effects. If a soldier is trained properly
and is prepared he will be able to anticipate these responses in himself and others, and can then
initiate measures to control the effects of combat stress.

9. Combat stress can activate the body’s sympathetic nervous system (SNS) and create a
condition commonly known as the “flight or fight” response. Activation of the SNS is a
powerful survival mechanism shared by all mammals, enabling them to completely focus all the
body’s resources on either charging toward or running away from an opponent. The process is
automatic, virtually uncontrollable, and dominates all voluntary systems until the threat has been
eliminated or avoided. It can result from any of the following:

a. an imminent threat of serious injury to the soldier;

b. reaction time to a threat is minimal;

4 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Principles of Close Quarter Combat

c. a potentially life threatening situation; or

d. a soldier lacks confidence in his training/skill level to cope with the threat.

10. While flight or fight can be extremely effective in battle, it may not be during peace
support or aid to civil power operations. The soldier must understand the effect of combat stress
on the SNS, especially when required to make split second, life or death decisions.

11. Effects of Heart Rate on Performance. The heart is responsible for the massive
discharge of stress hormones throughout the body via the bloodstream, and thus heart rate and
SNS activation are linked. SNS activation will drive the heart rate from a normal range of 60-80
beats per minute (BPM) to over 200 BPM within seconds.

12. The optimal range for combat performance is between 115 and 145 BPM. When the
heart rate is within this range complex motor skills, visual reaction time, and cognitive reaction
time will be at their highest. Consequently, a soldier with a heart rate between 115 and 145 BPM
will have a sharp and clear mind, reaction time will be at its peak, and close-range shooting skills
will be at their best.

13. When the heart rate reaches 115 BPM, fine motor skills begin to deteriorate. At a heart
rate of 145 BPM, complex motor skills begin to deteriorate and soldiers lose their ability to
recognize and react to potentially hazardous situations. This is not to say a soldier will fail to
react to a stressful situation when the heart rate surpasses 145 BPM, however performance will
diminish.

14. At a heart rate of 175 BPM, gross motor skills, i.e. flight or fight, are the only physical
actions that can be performed well. It is within this range that the most significant symptoms of
SNS activation occur. Vasoconstriction is at its highest, almost completely shutting down blood
flow for surface wounds. Soldiers may experience auditory exclusion and tunnel vision. Near
vision and depth perception will also deteriorate. Irrational behaviour such as freezing in place
and becoming submissive or passive will occur. Soldiers may also experience loss of bladder
and bowel control, caused by redirecting energy from non-essential muscles that control the
bladder and the sphincter. These effects are due to hormonal induced heart rate increases.
Increases caused by exercise, such as wind sprints, will not have the same impact.

15. Each of the five sensory systems, also referred to as the perceptual senses, provide the
brain with a constant flow of information. However, when the brain becomes focused on an
activity or threat it will tune in the sensory system that provides the most relevant information at
that given time. The brain will tune out all other sensory inputs because they lack immediate
significance. This is known as perceptual narrowing or selective attention.

16. Auditory Exclusion. During SNS activation, the perceptual narrowing process becomes
critical. In combat vision usually provides the most relevant information. As a result, the brain
stops processing information from the other senses, particularly the auditory system. This is
referred to as auditory exclusion. Selective attention can also tune out other tactile sensations
(the sense of feeling or touch), so that scratches, cuts, blows and even bullet wounds may not be
felt. When the auditory system is the dominant source of information, visual exclusion may
occur due to low-or no-light environments.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 5
Close Quarter Combat

17. Auditory exclusion is a powerful process that can limit a soldier’s ability to process
critical information in combat. Verbal orders, information shouted by another soldier, or even an
opponent’s shouts to surrender may not be heard. Thus one should use visual methods, such as
moving in front of a soldier to get his attention. This is one reason why successful combat
leaders have always led from the front.

18. Effects on Vision. SNS-induced vasoconstriction and hormonal processes have a


profound effect on the entire body, including vision. In a combat stress environment this has a
devastating impact on a soldier’s ability to perform a task, since vision plays such an important
role in nearly every aspect of survival performance. Tactical implications of SNS activation on
vision include:

a. Tunnel Vision. The field of vision narrows as though one were looking through
a tunnel or tube, with the peripheral field reduced 70% or more. Perceptual
narrowing causes all senses except one, usually vision, to close or be greatly
diminished. Thus the mind is processing only minimal information and may miss
critical information, such as threat cues.

b. Loss of Near Vision. When near vision loss occurs a soldier will experience
great difficulty focusing on objects closer than 1 metre. This is due to pupil
dilation, a by-product of SNS activation. Dilated pupils degrade a soldier’s ability
to aim a weapon or focus on close threats and visual cues.

c. Loss of Ability to Focus. Relaxation and loss of control over the muscles that
control the lens causes distortion while focusing on a target. Thus, even a small
amount of sensory information being processed by the brain is flawed, causing a
significant decrease in accuracy and a significant increase in reaction time.

d. Loss of Monocular Vision. Monocular vision is predominantly used in shooting


where accuracy is critical, such as firing a pistol or rifle over an extended distance
or sniping. SNS activation inhibits monocular vision, so that the soldier will “see
double”. Binocular dominance, during SNS activation, will inhibit the accuracy
of distance shooting, however, it can enhance accuracy during close engagements.

e. Loss of Depth Perception. A soldier to incorrectly judges distance and believes


that the target is either closer or further away than it actually is when depth
perception is lost. Depth perception usually deteriorates when soldiers are
surprised by a spontaneous deadly force assault and have to quickly return fire,
often resulting in soldier firing low and to his dominant side.

f. Loss of Night Vision. The eye’s night vision receptors are located primarily in
the peripheral field, thus the loss of peripheral vision also results in loss of night
vision. This is why soldiers are taught to look around an object at night, in order
to see it with their night vision receptors.

19. If SNS activation occurs then these negative effects upon vision cannot be avoided, but
they can be minimized through proper training. For example, soldiers should be taught to pivot
their head, rather than just darting their eyes, in order to compensate for tunnel vision. Similarly,

6 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Principles of Close Quarter Combat

shooting programs can emphasize instinctive shooting which reduces the need to rely on sights at
close range.

20. Effects of Combat Stress on Reaction Time. Surviving close quarter combat depends
on a soldier’s reaction time. Survival reaction time is the process of perceiving a threat and
initiating a survival response. This includes sensory perception, processing sensory input, and
motor skill performance. These functions are connected, and survival reaction time will suffer
when any function is disrupted.

21. Survival reaction time is a four-step process:

a. perception;

b. analyzing and evaluating the information or threat level;

c. formulating the response; and

d. initiating a motor response.

22. These steps must be completed in sequence, the execution of each step depending on the
information available at the previous step. Reaction time will increase if any of the previous
steps lack sufficient information. Research has shown that information processing will begin to
deteriorate when the heart rate exceeds 145 BPM, and physical performance will become very
poor when the heart rate exceeds 175 BPM.

23. The survival reaction model corresponds with the effects of SNS activation on vision. As
the visual field collapses and sensory perception is disrupted, the brain’s ability to analyze and
evaluate information is also impeded. In addition, if these two steps are disrupted, response
selection and motor response will not occur.

24. The impact of SNS activation on cognitive processing and survival reaction time
includes:

a. survival reaction time can take more than four times longer;

b. disrupted concentration;

c. failure to develop logical survival responses;

d. irrational behaviour;

e. repetitive actions;

f. freezing in place; and

g. submissive behaviour.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 7
Close Quarter Combat

25. Deterioration of Motor Skill Performance. Combat stress, by diminishing motor skills,
can have a detrimental effect on physical performance. SNS will affect motor skills in the
following ways:

a. Fine Motor Skills. When the heart rate reaches around 115 BPM
vasoconstriction of the fingers and hands begins to reduce the dexterity required
to perform fine motor skills which require hand/eye coordination and hand
dexterity, e.g. precision shooting or safe vehicle operation. .

b. Complex Motor Skills. At approximately 145 BPM, complex motor skills begin
to deteriorate. These skills involve muscle groups in a series of movements
requiring hand/eye coordination, precision, tracking and timing, e.g. shooting
stances in which muscle groups are working in different or asymmetrical
movements, or a takedown that has multiple independent components.

c. Gross Motor Skills. These are the only motor skills that actually increase
effectiveness as the heart rate increases, because gross motor skills are simple
strength skills or skills involving symmetrical movements that involve large
muscle or major muscle groups, e.g. punching, striking with batons, or simple
shooting stances.

26. The effects of SNS activation on motor skills must be constantly considered. Whenever
possible, individuals required to conduct fine motor skill tasks should not be placed in frontline
confrontations, and a reserve should be withheld from a stressful confrontation so that it may be
called forward to perform fine motor skills if required.

27. Vasoconstriction. One of the initial symptoms of vasoconstriction is a lack of


circulation at high levels of SNS activation. Vasoconstriction will reduce finger and hand
dexterity, and can inhibit vision. It also limits blood loss, thus during combat a body can endure
major wounds without significant bleeding. This can be very deceptive, as the lack of bleeding
makes it appear that the wound is not critical. However, as SNS activation begins to decrease
and the body returns to “normal” an opposite effect occurs known as vasodilatation, which
increases bleeding. Therefore it is critical that all gunshot wounds or knife wounds be treated
with pressure dressings as soon as possible following the incident. If a wound is bleeding
excessively during SNS activation this indicates arterial bleeding, and appropriate first aid
should be applied.

28. Endurance Limitations on Combat Performance. Combat fitness is an integral


component of close quarter combat. The combination of aerobic (cardio/respiratory) and
anaerobic (strength) conditioning not only enhances the soldier’s ability to control and overcome
an opponent but also increases his ability to survive.

29. The human body has limitations when exposed to high intensity close quarter combat
activities. Under ideal conditions, the average soldier will have approximately 10 to 15 seconds
to control a threat, expending or burning energy during this time. After this initial burn time the
soldier can expect to experience a dramatic decrease in strength and energy output. The body
relies primarily on three energy systems: the ATP (adenosin triphosphate) system, the lactic acid

8 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Principles of Close Quarter Combat

system, and the aerobic system. Each system can be equated to high performance fuels, which
are designed to burn at different rates for varying levels of intensity. As with any fuel system,
each energy system has a predictable burn time before performance will decrease.

30. For example, consider a situation where a soldier is employed in an aid to civil power
operation and is suddenly attacked by an opponent who is bigger and stronger. During the first
10 to 15 seconds the soldier will normally maintain his balance and neutralize the opponent’s
attempts at takedowns. If the soldier fails to control the opponent within 15 seconds, the
soldier’s strength output begins to dramatically decline and the soldier will be forced to escalate.
If the soldier’s attempt to escalate fails, then his probability of survival deteriorates substantially
unless he resorts to deadly force escalation. The different energy systems perform as follows
during combat:

a. ATP System. ATP consists of small energy bundles stored in the muscles. It is
used during high energy and high strength activities, such as sprinting, lifting very
heavy weights, or defending against an aggressive assault. When this system is
engaged, the soldier will perform at 100% of maximum output. The system burns
out after 10 to 15 seconds, with a 45% decrease in maximum energy.

b. Lactic Acid System. Once the ATP system has been depleted, the lactic acid
system comes on-line to act as an “afterburner” fuel. This fuel will not burn as
hot as ATP, but provides the soldier about 45 seconds of intermediate strength
and endurance. So while during the first 10 to 15 seconds of a confrontation a
soldier can expect to perform at 100% of maximum, once the lactic acid system is
engaged a soldier’s energy level will reduce to 55% at 30 seconds, and 35% at 60
seconds.

c. Aerobic System. After about 90 seconds the lactic acid is depleted and the
aerobic system becomes the final and dominant fuel system. The aerobic system
is fuelled by a combination of oxygen, carbohydrates and free fatty acids. This
system is very economical and can burn for long periods, depending on the
soldier’s cardio/respiratory conditioning. Unfortunately, when the aerobic system
is activated after ATP and lactic acid depletion the soldier’s maximum energy will
be reduced to approximately 30%.

31. Preventing or Reducing SNS Activation. Five major variables have an immediate
impact on the level of SNS activation:

a. perceived level of threat;

b. time needed to respond;

c. level of confidence and personal skill;

d. level of experience in dealing with the specific threat; and

e. physical stress (fatigue, sleep deprivation, malnutrition) in combination with


survival stress.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 9
Close Quarter Combat

32. These variables can be strongly influenced through proper training and prior preparation.
Realistic scenario-based training will aid the soldier by allowing him to understand effects on
both him and his team, and will also act as a form of combat stress inoculation.

33. As well, accelerated heart rates, panic attacks, and SNS activation can be reduced and
controlled through a simple breathing exercise:

a. inhale through the nose for 4 seconds and hold for 4 seconds;

b. exhale through the mouth 4 seconds and hold for 4 seconds; and

c. repeat four times.

10 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 2
FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT

SECTION 1
CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT RANGE BANDS
1. Close quarter combat engagements occur within three range bands: long range, mid-
range, and close range. These ranges may blur together very quickly and at times jump from one
to the other, depending on the actions of the soldier or the opponent’s reaction. When close
quarter combat is probable the soldier should always try to maintain a reactionary gap of 2 to 3
metres from his opponent.

2. Long Range. Long range engagements use the rifle/bayonet or kicks. They may also
include attacks with poles or sticks, or the entrenching tool.

3. Mid-range. Mid-range engagements use knives, batons and hand strikes. At this range,
the soldier has to be prepared to advance to apply close range techniques, or back off to long-
range techniques, depending on the situation.

4. Close Range. Close range techniques include knee, elbow and hand strikes, as well as
throws, takedowns and grappling. The soldier should remember that pressure points are
available to aid in escaping holds. Biting and gouging techniques are also effective.

SECTION 2
VULNERABLE POINTS OF THE BODY
5. Vulnerable points are areas of the body which are susceptible to blows or pressure. The
soldier is striking to subdue and/or kill the opponent, therefore any concept of fair play should be
forgotten, and quick violent blows to vulnerable points should be implemented. In doing so the
soldier may cause the opponent to drop his defence temporarily, allowing follow-up blows to
other vulnerable points. The vulnerable points of the body are organized in five major groups:
head, neck, torso, groin, and extremities. Before proceeding further, familiarize yourself with
the parts of the body depicted at Figure 2-1.

6. Head. The vulnerable points of the head are the eyes, temple, ears, nose and jaw:

a. Eyes. Blows to and raking or gouging of the eyes will cause temporary or
permanent blindness and intense pain.

a. Temple. Forceful blows to the temple, one of the most fragile areas of the head,
may cause unconsciousness and possibly death.

b. Ears. Sharp, heavy blows to the ears can cause brain concussion or ruptured
eardrums and internal bleeding.

c. Nose. A very sensitive area of the face, the nose can be easily broken, and when
struck will cause immediate watering of the eyes. It must be stressed that some

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 11
Close Quarter Combat

individuals may have the conditioning to withstand a blow to the nose, so the
soldier must be ready to apply a follow up blow immediately.

d. Jaw. When the jaw is struck forcefully the opponent may lose consciousness. A
strike to the jaw will cause immense pain and damage to the teeth, lips and
tongue. Note that the risk of self-injury is great unless the soldier strikes the jaw
with a hard object such as a boot, rifle butt or helmet..

7. Neck. The front of the neck is a soft tissue area that is not covered by natural protection.
When striking this area it is possible to cause the trachea to swell, leading to unconsciousness or
even death. The areas to strike are the throat and nape of the neck:

a. Striking the throat will cause swelling of the trachea and lead to asphyxiation. A
trachea tear or forceful strike may kill the opponent.

b. The back of the neck contains the spine and occipital nerve, which provides the
nervous system’s link to the brain. The weight of the head and lack of large
muscle mass leads to severe spinal damage when repeated forceful blows are
delivered. Striking this area will cause loss of vision and balance, temporary or
permanent paralysis, or kill the opponent.

8. Torso. The torso contains the vital organs of the body and provides the most natural
protection. The areas which the soldier should target are as follows:

a. Collarbone (clavicle). A violent kick or strike to the collarbone, which is very


fragile, will cause it to break or fracture and immobilize the arm.

b. Solar Plexus. A forceful blow to the solar plexus or centre of the chest will
knock the wind out of the opponent, causing breathlessness and possible internal
injuries.

c. Ribs. Violent and repeated blows to the ribs will cause intense pain. If the
soldier applies repeated blows to the same area the bones may break and cause
internal injuries, such as a punctured lung.

d. Stomach. A sharp blow to the stomach may cause breathlessness and internal
injuries.

e. Kidneys. Powerful blows to the kidneys may cause immobilization, shock and
permanent damage.

f. Spine. Violent blows to the spine can cause pinching and/or severing of the
spinal cord, leading to intense pain or paralysis.

9. Groin. The groin is another soft tissue area that lacks natural protection. Any damage to
this area causes the opponent to involuntarily alter his stance to protect the area. Females are
affected just the same as males, the only difference being that a near miss to the scrotum of the

12 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

male will still cause severe pain. A violent blow can cause unconsciousness and/or internal
damage.

10. Extremities. Rarely will an attack to the arms and legs cause death, but they are still
important targets. A limb can be immobilized by delivering forceful blows to the joints in a
direction opposite to the natural bend.

Figure 2-1: Body Side, Front and Back

SECTION 3
PRESSURE POINTS OF THE BODY
11. Knowledge of pressure points enables the soldier to control an opponent through pain
compliance without causing death or serious injury, an important tool in situations where deadly
force is not authorized. A soldier can also use pressure points to distract an opponent so lethal
techniques can be applied. Before proceeding further, familiarize yourself with the pressure
points of the body depicted at Figure 2-2.

12. Some areas of the body are susceptible to pain:

a. areas where there are many nerve endings;

b. areas where nerves cross bones close to the outer skin; and

c. arterial pressure points.

13. Two methods of applying pressure point control are:

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 13
Close Quarter Combat

a. touch pressure using the fingertip; and

b. striking techniques.

14. Five steps to correctly apply touch pressure to a nerve are:

a. stabilize the target;

b. apply pressure/counter-pressure;

c. apply pressure with fingertip(s);

d. loud repetitive verbal commands; and

e. alleviate pressure when compliance is achieved.

15. Infra Orbital Nerve. The infra orbital nerve is located at the base of the nose. This
pressure point is vulnerable to touch pressure with the index finger, pushing in and up on the
underside of the nose at a 45 degree angle toward the top centre of the head. This will cause
medium to high intensity pain, watering of the eyes, and a low level stunning effect. This
technique can be used to gain compliance by inflicting pain, enabling the soldier to force balance
displacement on the opponent. This pressure point can be used in conjunction with the
Mandibular Angle (see paragraph 16) for enhanced pain. This pressure point may not be
effective against some opponents, e.g. those who have previously broken their nose or have
inhaled cocaine.

16. Mandibular Angle. The mandibular angle is located where the three nerves run together
behind the mandible at the base of the ear lobe. This pressure point is vulnerable to touch
pressure or quick penetration. Pressure is applied using the fingertips, the thumb or the knuckle
between the mandible and the mastoid at the base of the ear lobe, directed toward the nose. This
will cause medium to high intensity pain, immediate signs of submission, and probable cessation
of all intentional motor activity. This technique is used to attain opponent compliance through
pain. Enhanced pain can be inflicted if used in conjunction with the infra orbital nerve.

17. Hypoglossal Nerve. The Hypoglossal Nerve is located 2.5 centimetres forward of the
“R” angle of the mandible, 2.5 centimetres under the jaw. This pressure point is vulnerable to
touch pressure or quick penetration. Pressure is applied with the thumb, supported by the fist, or
the unsupported fingertips, pushing toward the top and centre of the skull. When touch pressure
is applied it causes medium to high intensity pain, immediate signs of submission, cessation of
all motor activity, and involuntary hyperextension of the arms. If quick penetration is applied,
immediate cessation of all intentional motor activity will occur as well as mental stunning,
lasting 3 to 7 seconds. This technique is used as a distraction technique, to gain compliance
through pain, or to displace the opponent’s balance.

18. Jugular Notch. The Jugular Notch is at the base of the front of the neck in the notch
formed at the centre of the clavicle. This pressure point is vulnerable to pressure applied in a
quick stabbing motion, or to touch pressure. Pressure is applied with the fingers down at a 45
degree angle in both cases. When touch pressure is applied it redistributes the opponent’s

14 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

balance, causes involuntary flexing away from the pressure, and immediate cessation of the
aggressive thought process. If the quick penetration method is used it causes immediate
cessation of all intentional motor activity, redistributes the opponent’s balance, causes
involuntary flexing away from the pressure, and low level mental stunning. This technique is
used as distraction, to cause balance displacement, or to create space when grappling.

19. Brachial Plexus (Origin). The Brachial Plexus (Origin) is formed by nerve fibres
stemming from the vertebrae in the neck. These nerves meet and form the Brachial Plexus group
at the side of the neck, approximately 15 centimetres from the base of the neck, between two
groups of the Sterno Cleido Mastoid muscle. Striking techniques are used to attack this pressure
point. When striking, pressure is directed to the centre of the neck. When touch pressure is
applied, medium to high intensity pain can be expected, causing motor dysfunction to the
affected arm and hand, and probable signs of submission. The expected effects of striking
techniques are a high degree of pain, immediate cessation of motor activity, probability of
temporary motor dysfunction to the affected arm, mental stunning for approximately 3 to 7
seconds, and possible low levels of unconsciousness. This technique is used for pain compliance
and to cause motor dysfunction.

20. Brachial Plexus (Tie In). The Brachial Plexus (Tie In) is located at the shoulder joint.
Hand strikes and direct pressure with the thumb are effective against this nerve. Note that this is
most successful if the arm is beside the body when the attack is made. When touch pressure is
applied high intensity pain is expected and cessation of all intentional motor activity occurs.
Motor dysfunction to the affected arm and hand, and immediate signs of submission, may also be
seen. The expected effects of striking techniques are high intensity pain, temporary motor
dysfunction to the affected arm and hand, possible flexing of the hand, mental stunning lasting 3
to 7 seconds, and numbing or tingling in the affected hand . This technique is used to cause
motor dysfunction.

21. Suprascapular Nerve. The Suprascapular Nerve is located at the junction where the
trapezius connects to the side of the neck. Striking techniques, such as the hammer fist and
knife-edge strikes, are used to deliver an attack from the rear. The angle of attack is directly
toward the ground. The effects of the strike are high intensity pain, temporary motor dysfunction
to the affected arm or hand, possible flexing of the hand, mental stunning for 3 to 7 seconds, and
numbing or tingling of the hand. This technique causes motor dysfunction and a flex/reflex
response, used to get the opponent to release a grip on an object or individual.

22. Radial Nerve. The Radial Nerve runs along the inside of the forearm along the radius
bone. Striking techniques applied with the hand or impact weapons to the Radial Nerve are a
softening technique to distract the opponent and/or disarm him prior to other strikes. Expected
effects of striking techniques are medium to high intensity pain, motor dysfunction to the
affected arm or hand, and possible flex/reflex response to the affected hand.

23. Ulna Nerve . The Ulna Nerve is on the outside of the forearm along the Ulna Bone.
Strikes and direct pressure applied with the hand or impact weapons to the Ulna Nerve are a
softening technique to distract the opponent prior to a lethal or non-lethal blow. Expected effects
of striking techniques are medium to high intensity pain, motor dysfunction to the affected arm
or hand, and possible flex/reflex response to the affected hand.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 15
Close Quarter Combat

24. Femoral Nerve. The Femoral Nerve is on the inside of the thigh along the femur bone.
The striking point is midway down the thigh. Repeated hand and elbow strikes are very
effective. Expected effects of striking techniques are temporary immobilization and motor
function of the affected leg; severe pain, and mental stunning lasting for 3 to 7 seconds. This
technique can also be used to break a hold such as the scissors hold.

25. Peroneal Nerve. The Peroneal Nerve is the easiest of the three motor points in the leg to
strike. Its location on the outside of the leg makes it an easy target for both leg and impact
weapon strikes. Located just above the back of the knee, the Peroneal Nerve branches off the
Sciatic Nerve and travels around the outside of the knee, just under the knee cap. Impact should
be as close to the Sciatic Nerve and Peroneal Nerve as possible. Expected effects of striking
techniques are temporary immobilization and motor dysfunction of the affected leg, flex/reflex
response of the affected leg, probable sympathetic reflex response of the unaffected leg, severe
pain, and mental stunning for 3 to 7 seconds. This technique can be applied from the fighting
stance, helping to bring the opponent off balance and enabling a non-lethal blow to be delivered.

26. Tibial Nerve. The Tibial Nerve is the lower branch of the Sciatic Nerve. It starts just
above the back of the knee and runs down the back of the leg through the calf muscle. This
pressure point is generally used for impact weapons and leg strikes from a rear oblique angle.
The strike should be delivered directly in to the calf, preferably at the top. The expected effects
of striking techniques are temporary immobilization and motor dysfunction of the affected leg,
flex/reflex response of the affected leg, probable sympathetic reflex response of the unaffected
leg, severe pain, and mental stunning for 3 to 7 seconds. This technique can be employed when
attacking with a baton, or heel of the boot when executing a leg sweep.

NOTE
All hinge joints (E.G. fingers, elbows) are designed to bend one-way, and THUS
any pressure in the opposite direction will cause intense pain.

16 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-2: Pressure Points of the Body

SECTION 4
STRIKING SURFACES
27. In close quarter combat any hardened portion of the body can serve as a weapon. Hands,
elbows, feet and knees are used the most, and they become effective and powerful weapons
when strengthened through proper training.

28. No one part of the body is effective if striking on its own. When employing striking
surfaces the soldier must ensure that all parts of the body work as one when impacting the target.

29. Hands and Arms. Hands, forearms and elbows are the individual weapons of the arms.
The hand itself consists of several surfaces that can be employed as weapons, including the
fingers, palm, edges of the hand, and fists.

30. Fists. The hand can be used both opened and closed. For beginners a fist is the most
effective striking surface (see Figure 2-3). To form a fist, fold the fingers so the tips touch the
base of the fingers. Continue bending the fingers inward until they are tightly pressed in to the
palm. Fold the thumb over the fingers and press tightly across the index and middle fingers.
When forming a fist in this manner it is not unusual for the baby finger to become relaxed; try to
prevent this from occurring. Use the fist to strike soft tissue areas such as the throat. The part of
the fist which strikes the target is the area from slightly above the middle joint to the knuckle of
the index and middle fingers (see Figure 2-4).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 17
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-3: Making a Fist

Figure 2-4: Striking Surface of the Fist

31. Back Fist. The hand is formed in a normal fist. The tops of the knuckles of the index
and middle fingers on the back of the hand are the part of the fist used for striking (see Figure 2-
5). The back fist is primarily used to attack the face and side of the body. This strike is
delivered with a snapping motion of the forearm.

18 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-5: Back Fist

32. Hammer Fist. After forming the fist, use the bottom of the fist along the meaty portion
below the baby finger to strike (see Figure 2-6). As with the back fist ensure that you snap the
forearm to deliver the attack.

Figure 2-6: Hammer Fist

33. Knife Hand and Ridge Hand. The knife hand is one of the most versatile and
devastating strikes. The striking surface is the cutting edge of the hand, i.e. the meaty portion of
the hand below the little finger extending to the top of the wrist (see Figure 2-7). The striking
surface is narrow, allowing strikes on the neck between the opponent’s body armour and helmet.
The ridge hand-striking surface is the bony portion between the thumb and the wrist (see Figure
2-8).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 19
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-7: Knife Hand

Figure 2-8: Ridge Hand

34. Fingers. The fingers can be used to gouge and rake the eyes and face.

35. Forearms. Use the forearms to strike the opponent and break joints and limbs. A soldier
will sustain less injury when strikes are conducted with the forearms than when strikes are
applied with fists and fingers.

36. Elbows. Due to the short striking distance needed to generate power, elbows are
excellent weapons for close range striking. Elbow strikes are possible from the front, rear and
side. The strike may travel upward, downward and in a half circle, as well as in a straight line
parallel to the ground.

37. Legs. The legs are the most powerful weapons on the soldier’s body and are less prone
to injury when striking. The feet are protected by boots and are the choice for striking. The
soldier can use knees and feet to attack with devastating force.

38. Knees. Like elbows, knees are excellent weapons during close range fighting. Knees are
employed at close range. The groin or peroneal nerve are the primary target for the knee strike if

20 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

the opponent is standing. If the opponent is bent at the waist, or on the ground, knee strikes to
the head and ribs are highly effective.

39. Ball and Toe of the Foot. The ball of the foot is used mainly for thrust kicks. The toe of
the foot is used mainly for snap kicks. The attack with the ball or toe of the foot can be
employed to the face, chest, abdomen, groin and leg areas (see Figure 2-9).

Figure 2-9: Ball and Toe of the Foot

40. Top of the Foot. The top of the foot runs from the toes to the ankle. The foot is
stretched downward and the toes point downward. Use the instep (see Figure 2-10) to kick the
groin.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 21
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-10: Instep Strike

41. Heel. The heel is used in kicks directed backward or sideways, and for foot stomps. It
can also be used when an opponent is attempting to attack from the rear or side.

SECTION 5
CLOSE QUARTER COMBAT STANCES
42. Two stances are employed during close quarter combat training, the Natural Stance and
the Fighting Stance.

43. Natural Stance. The Natural Stance (see Figure 2-11) is used during periods of
instruction and for safety checks. It is a natural and comfortable stance. Both feet are placed flat
on the ground and in line approximately shoulder width apart. The toes are pointed out
approximately 10 degrees. Relaxed fists are formed with both hands placed at the front of the
body.

22 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-11: Natural Stance

44. Fighting Stance. If the body lacks balance and stability, offensive and defensive
techniques will be ineffective. The ability to defend against an attack under any circumstances
depends largely upon maintaining a correct stance. Powerful, fast, accurate and smoothly
executed techniques can be performed only from a strong and stable base. The upper body must
be set on this strong base, and the back must be kept straight. Although an effective attack or
defence is impossible without a strong stance, it is only necessary to assume this position just
before delivering an attack or reacting in a defensive manner. If the soldier concentrates too
much on remaining in a firm and stable position, mobility will be lost.

45. The following points are key to developing a good stance. The soldier must:

a. be well balanced when applying offensive and defensive techniques;

b. be able to rotate hips smoothly when executing techniques;

c. apply techniques with the greatest possible speed; and

d. ensure that the muscles used in the attack and defence work together
harmoniously.

46. The primary consideration, as stated earlier, is establishing a strong and stable base.
From this base feet, legs, trunk, arms and hands must be controlled individually, but at the same
time work together as a single harmonious unit. It is important to remember that in addition to
stability while in the fighting stance, the stance must provide enough strength and firmness to
withstand the shock caused by the application of techniques against the soldier.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 23
Close Quarter Combat

47. To adopt the fighting stance (see Figure 2-12), take a pace forward with the left/right
foot, whichever feels most natural. The feet should be about shoulder width apart. The lead toe
is pointed inward to prevent foot sweeps and also to allow the knee to naturally move inward and
protect the groin. The knee of the lead leg should be directly above the lead foot. The rear foot
should point in the same direction as the lead foot. This will naturally turn the hips to an angle
of about 45 degrees. In doing so vulnerable points such as the groin and solar plexus are
protected, and the soldier will be able to rotate the hips to generate power when striking.
Distribute body weight evenly on both legs. Bend the knees slightly. The hands are positioned
in front of and close to the centre of the body, with loosely clenched fists and thumbs in line with
the cheekbones. The shoulders are relaxed with the lead hand forward. Elbows are close
protecting the body. The chin is lowered slightly to protect the throat.

Figure 2-12: Fighting Stance

SECTION 6
BASIC MOVEMENT
48. Stepping Forward and to the Rear. The soldier may be required to move forward or
rearward for both offensive and defensive techniques. The soldier must also end the movement
in the proper fighting stance.

49. Stepping forward is executed by shifting the weight to the lead foot and bringing the rear
foot straight forward, re-adopting a fighting stance.

50. Stepping rearward is executed by shifting the body weight to the rear foot and bringing
the forward foot a full step to the rear, re-adopting a fighting stance.

24 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

51. Shifting Forward, Rearward and Laterally. The soldier uses a lead leg stepping action
(shift) to move. This movement is used both offensively and defensively. There are eight
directions of movement (see Figure 2-13).

Figure 2-13: Directions of Movement

52. To shift forward the soldier moves the foot closest to the direction of movement, then
draws the other foot forward in to the fighting stance (see Figures 2-14 to 2-16). The soldier
must ensure that the movement of his feet are not so great as to cause balance displacement in his
stance.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 25
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-14: Forward Shift—Start Point

Figure 2-15: Forward Shift—Mid-point

26 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Fundamentals of Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-16: Forward Shift—Finish

53. Turns to the Rear. To turn to the rear the soldier shifts the rear leg forward at a 45
degree angle in line with the lead leg, then steps back out in a 45 degree angle with the same leg,
rotating the body quickly to re-adopt the fighting stance (see Figures 2-17 to 2-19). Note that if
the soldier is in the left leg forward fighting stance the body rotates to the right, and the exact
opposite is done in the right leg forward fighting stance.

Figure 2-17: Turn to the Rear—Start

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 27
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 2-18: Turn to the Rear—Mid-point

Figure 2-19: Turn to the Rear—Finish

28 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 3
THROWS, TAKEDOWNS AND BREAKFALLS

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Throws and takedowns are used to throw an opponent to the ground during close combat.
The principles of balance, leverage, timing and body position are applied to upset an opponent’s
balance and gain control by forcing him to the ground. Throws and takedowns are effective
because they rely on the momentum and power generated by the opponent rather than the
strength and size of the soldier. Properly executed throws can be devastating, possibly causing
broken limbs or unconsciousness.

2. When executing a throw or takedown the soldier must not fall with the opponent.
Balance must be maintained and a strong stance re-adopted. Once the opponent is on the ground
a series of lethal follow-up techniques can be applied such as knee drops, stomps, hand strikes,
and breaking the elbow, wrist or fingers.

3. There are three stages which must be applied for a throw or takedown to be effective.
Failure to complete any stage will neutralize the effectiveness of the technique. In sequence the
stages are:

a. balance displacement, by pushing or pulling;

b. proper entry in to the technique; and

c. execution of the technique.

4. The type of throw or takedown will depend on the opponent’s choice of attack or
defence, and the location of his weakest balance point.

5. Balance displacement occurs as a result of either pushing or pulling. When standing


there are eight directions in which the body’s balance may be displaced (see Figure 3-1). The
point of balance of a standing person is the navel. To execute a throw the soldier’s point of
balance must be below or equal to the opponent’s. For example, if you were leaning against a
chest high fence there would be little chance of falling, however if that fence was lowered to
waist height the body could topple easily.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 29
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-1: Directions for Balance Displacement

6. Once the opponent is off balance, the soldier must enter in to the technique, ensuring the
opponent cannot regain his balance and that he does not allow his own balance to be disrupted.

7. The throw or takedown will only be possible if the opponent is off balance and the soldier
is in the correct position. The soldier must apply pressure or use leverage correctly to make the
throw. Again, note that all stages of the technique are interdependent and must flow together.

8. The soldier must fully commit to the throw or takedown to be successful, but must also
be prepared for counters to the technique. He must then immediately switch to another throw or
employ striking techniques to neutralize the opponent.

SECTION 2
THROWS

HIP THROW

9. The hip throw is used to take the opponent to the ground while the soldier remains
standing. This throw is effective when the opponent is moving forward or pushing, and to
counter common attacks. Use the opponent’s forward momentum to execute the hip throw as
follows (see Figures 3-2 to 3-6):

a. Grasp the opponent’s upper arm with the left hand.

b. Step forward with the right foot and place it against the front of the opponent’s
right foot. At the same time grasp the opponent around the waist with the right
hand.

30 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

c. Step back with the left foot, rotating on the ball of the right foot, and place the
heel of the left foot so it is in front of the opponent’s left toe. The soldier’s and
opponent’s feet should form a box.

d. Lower the hips so they are below the opponent’s point of balance. Then
straighten the legs, pulling the opponent on to the right hip, to the point of
balance.

e. To execute the throw, pull the opponent’s left arm toward the left knee with the
left hand, simultaneously pushing with the right arm and stepping back slightly
with the right leg. Stepping back with the right leg drops the opponent off the hip
using gravity, allowing the soldier to use arm strength to generate more power in
the throw.

Figure 3-2: Hip Throw Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 31
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-3: Hip Throw—Foot Position

Figure 3-4: Hip Throw Step 2

32 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-5: Hip Throw Step 3

Figure 3-6: Hip Throw Step 4

SHOULDER THROW

10. As with the hip throw, the shoulder throw is used to take the opponent to the ground
while maintaining control. This throw is effective if the opponent is attacking with a grabbing
technique from the rear. Use the opponent’s forward momentum to execute the shoulder throw.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 33
Close Quarter Combat

This throw is more violent and has greater potential to break limbs or cause unconsciousness.
The soldier must remember to maintain his balance during and after making the throw. To
execute the shoulder throw (see Figures 3-7 to 3-10):

a. Grasp the opponent’s right upper arm with the left hand and pull him off balance.

b. Step in to the opponent, rotating the body on the ball of the left foot so the right
foot is inside the opponent’s right foot. Simultaneously shoot the right arm under
the opponent’s right arm and grasp the top of the right shoulder from behind. If
this cannot be achieved, e.g. on a taller opponent, then with the right hand grasp
the front of the shirt or webbing and pivot the elbow under the trapped armpit.
Then lower the chin in to the left shoulder.

c. Quickly slide the left foot beside the right foot so your feet form a box with the
opponent’s feet, bend the knees, and lower the hips below the opponent’s.

d. Ensure that the entire back is against the opponent’s torso.

e. Simultaneously pull the opponent’s arm across the body from the right shoulder to
the left knee, bend slightly at the waist, thrust the hips upward, and straighten the
legs.

f. Pull the opponent over the body to the left side, simultaneously shift the right leg
back to gain momentum, and finish the throw in a fighting stance.

Figure 3-7: Shoulder Throw Step 1

34 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-8: Shoulder Throw Step 2

Figure 3-9: Shoulder Throw Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 35
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-10: Shoulder Throw Step 4

TURNING THROW

11. The turning throw is used to take the opponent to the ground while the soldier remains
standing. A turning throw can be executed from a stationary position. It is particularly effective
if the soldier and the opponent are wearing full fighting order. To execute a turning throw (see
Figures 3-11 to 3-14):

a. Grasp the opponent’s right arm with the left hand.

b. Step forward with the right foot and place it past the outside of the opponent’s
right foot.

c. Hook the opponent’s right arm with the left arm, and pinch his arm between the
bicep and forearm, touching the body to the opponent’s.

d. Pull the opponent’s arm downward, keeping it close to the body.

e. Pivot to the left on the ball of the right foot and step back with the left leg.
Continue pulling downward on the opponent’s arm while rotating the arm
outward to unbalance him.

36 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-11: Turning Throw Step 1

Figure 3-12: Turning Throw Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 37
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-13: Turning Throw Step 3

Figure 3-14: Turning Throw Step 4

LEG SWEEP

12. The leg sweep is used to take the opponent to the ground. It is effective if the opponent is
already off balance and moving backward or pulling the soldier. To execute the leg sweep (see
Figures 3-15 to 3-19):

38 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

a. Grasp the opponent’s right arm with the left hand, using the right hand for a
trachea tear, eye gouge or brachial stun when the right leg strikes.

b. Step forward with the left foot on the outside and past the opponent’s right leg.

c. Pull the opponent’s right arm downward, close to the body, and push the upper
body backward to unbalance the opponent.

d. Raise the right knee just above the opponent’s knee and, as you thrust the
opponent backward, sweep the right leg backward, kicking the back of the calf
(tibial nerve) with the heel and driving the opponent to the ground.

e. A brachial stun or ridge hand to throat may be used in conjunction with the leg
sweep to take the opponent to the ground.

Figure 3-15: Leg Sweep Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 39
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-16: Leg Sweep Step 2

40 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-17: Leg Sweep Step 3

Figure 3-18: Leg Sweep Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 41
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-19: Leg Sweep Step 5

SECTION 3
TAKEDOWNS

HEAD TEAR DOWN

13. To execute the head tear down (see Figures 3-20 to 3-22) move to the opponent’s tactical
position 2, entering with an occipital strike. From this position the soldiers’ hand rotates to a
thumbs up position to act as a fulcrum, and the other hand strikes up in to the center of the jaw,
driving the head straight back. Continue to force the head back. Once the head is back as far as
possible and the opponent’s hips are forward, continue pressure to the head and step back with
the rear leg, driving the opponent to the ground. This technique may also be applied with a
trachea grab or ocular grip (see Figures 3-23 and 3-24) to force the head back.

42 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-20: Head Tear Down—Occipital Strike Step 1

Figure 3-21: Head Tear Down Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 43
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-22: Head Tear Down Step 3

Figure 3-23: Ocular Grip—Thumb

44 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-24: Ocular Grip—Fingers

COMPRESSION TAKEDOWN

14. This technique is used to take an opponent to the ground to a control position (see Figures
3-25 to 3-28):

a. execute a strike to the brachial plexus origin;

b. while the opponent is stunned, place both hands on the back of his neck;

c. bend the lead knee and using body weight force the opponent’s head directly
toward his feet, maintaining control of the head at all times; and

d. once on the ground move to a control position.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 45
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-25: Compression Takedown

Figure 3-26: Compression Takedown—Step 1

46 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-27: Compression Takedown—Step 2

Figure 3-28: Compression Takedown—Step 3

DOUBLE LEG TAKEDOWN

15. By attacking the legs, the soldier removes his opponent’s base. The soldier can close for
the takedown at both mid- and close range (see Figures 3-29 to 3-31). Lower the fighting stance
by bending the knees, using them to generate power drives in to the opponent’s midsection with
the shoulder (head to the outside). Wrap the opponent’s legs with the arms, placing the lead leg
as close as possible to the opponent’s legs. Continue to drive forward with the shoulder, pulling

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 47
Close Quarter Combat

the opponent’s legs toward the body. Body position is important for this takedown and you must
keep head up, back straight, and shoulders above the level of the hips. If possible drive the
opponent up off the ground, then throw to generate more power. Once the opponent is on the
ground, follow up with stomps to the groin, techniques to break the leg or ankle, or flip the
opponent and go to a rear control position.

Figure 3-29: Double Leg Takedown

Figure 3-30: Double Leg Takedown—Step1

48 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-31: Double Leg Takedown—Step 2

SINGLE LEG TAKEDOWN

16. Ideally the soldier should execute the double leg takedown, however if the opponent steps
back there may only be a chance to grab the lead leg. Therefore the entry in to this technique is
the same as the double leg takedown up to the point of wrapping the arms. Once the leg is
trapped, apply power to take the opponent to the ground (see Figures 3-32 and 3-33). With this
technique, the opponent maintains some balance rearward by hopping on one leg. Now turn and
force the opponent directly to the side or to the rear on an oblique angle. Body position is the
same as the double leg take down, and you can follow up with multiple techniques.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 49
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-32: Single Leg Takedown

Figure 3-33: Single Leg Takedown

LEG HOOK TAKEDOWN

17. The leg hook takedown originates from a standing grappling position. First, work to
tactical position 2, with the head directly behind and tight to the opponent’s shoulder, and the
arms wrapped high around the opponent. From this position, the opponent will have two
options, either to step away to his side and widen his stance, or circle forward or rearward. The
leg hook is used against an opponent stepping away (see Figures 3-34 to 3-36), as follows:

50 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

a. from the clinched position use the rear leg to sweep the opponent’s
nearest/supporting leg back between the legs, simultaneously pushing with the
upper body;

b. once the opponent starts to fall plant the sweeping leg to maintain balance and
prevent the knee striking the ground from the momentum of the throw;

c. just before the opponent hits the ground release the arms to prevent landing on
them; and

d. once the opponent is on the ground remain standing or mount the opponent and
use follow-up techniques.

Figure 3-34: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 51
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-35: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 2

Figure 3-36: Leg Hook Takedown—Step 3

REAR TAKEDOWN

18. As discussed in the previous paragraph, from a standing grappling position the
opponent’s second option is to circle forward or to the rear. The rear takedown is used against a
circling opponent (see Figures 3-7 and 3-38):

a. Step to one side so that you are behind the opponent at an angle.

52 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

b. With the rear leg, reach out and place the instep of the foot behind the opponent’s
far side foot to prevent him stepping back. Sit down as close to the forward foot
as possible and drop using bodyweight to make the throw.

c. The opponent will fall backward over the extended leg. As this happens, turn the
body backward to prevent the opponent from landing on top. Keep the elbows
tucked to the side to avoid falling on them.

Figure 3-37: Rear Takedown—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 53
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-38: Rear Takedown—Step 2

SECTION 4
COUNTERS TO THROWS/TAKEDOWNS
19. The key to not being thrown is to prevent the opponent from moving to tactical position 1
or 2 (the inside position). When attacking, if the opponent starts to apply a throw the best
defence is to hang as a dead weight and immediately launch a counter throw or attack (execute
stunning blows, rake the face, gouge the eyes, or attack pressure points).

20. If an opponent is attempting a double or single leg takedown, the soldier can defend using
a sprawl. To sprawl, immediately on contact with the opponent kick both legs back, keep the
head up to arc the back, and drive the elbows in to the opponent’s back. On hitting the ground
move immediately to a control position.

SECTION 5
BREAKFALLS
21. An opponent using a takedown or throw may take a soldier to the ground. The soldier
uses breakfalls to absorb the shock of the impact with the ground. Once a breakfall has been
executed, the soldier is in a defensive posture and must immediately attack to gain the initiative.

22. Breakfalls and rolls are a necessary part of close quarter combat training. Fear of falling
is instilled at birth and unless countered by training that fear remains. This fear can be
minimized by learning to land so that the major muscle groups absorb the shock of falling and
lessen the pain of impact. Training for breakfalls should be progressive, and all breakfalls
should be practiced repeatedly in all directions until they become instinctive.

54 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

23. When executing any breakfall technique the soldier must expel as much air as possible
from the lungs to prevent injury. This is done using a “ KEEOIA”, to forcefully expel the air;
the KEEOIA can be silent or loud.

24. After the breakfall is executed there must be immediate recovery from the technique.
The soldier must move to face the opponent executing the throw or takedown, and counter
follow-up attacks. From this position the soldier must execute counters such as leg sweeps or
kicks to gain distance and, as soon as possible, recover to the fighting stance.

SECTION 6
REAR BREAKFALLS

LYING

25. Lie flat on the mat; tuck the chin in to the chest, and cross the arms on the chest with each
hand touching the opposite shoulder (see Figures 3-39 to 3-41).

26. Force the arms to the side at a 30 to 40 degree angle, striking the ground with the full
extent of the arms and palms of the hands, simultaneously exhaling air from the lungs. Upon
striking the mat, draw the hands back in front of the body with one arm above the head and the
other arm covering the mid-section in a defensive posture. Bring the legs up with the feet above
the body, one leg being chambered1 to kick or deflect an attack from above.

27. This is the basic rear breakfall. It should be repeated before proceeding to other
breakfalls, confirming that it feels natural for the hands to strike the mat and adopt the defensive
posture.

1
See Chapter 4, paragraph 12, for a description of chambering the leg in a fighting stance. The same principles
apply in a breakfall.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 55
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-39: Rear Breakfall Lying—Step 1

Figure 3-40: Rear Breakfall Lying—Step 2

56 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-41: Back Breakfall Lying—Step 3

SITTING

28. Sit on the mat with the knees bent, chin tucked in to the chest and arms crossed on the
chest (see Figures 3-42 to 3-44). Roll back and bring the legs up over the body, with the feet up
to deflect an attack from above. Strike the mats and exhale, and return to the defensive posture.

Figure 3-42: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 57
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-43: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 2

Figure 3-44: Back Breakfall Sitting—Step 3

SQUATTING

29. Squat on the mat, placing the hands in the same position as when sitting (see Figures 3-45
to 3-47).

30. Roll back letting the buttocks touch the mat first. Carry out the basic breakfall as when
sitting.

58 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-45: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 1

Figure 3-46: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 59
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-47: Back Breakfall Squatting—Step 3

STANDING

31. Stands with the back bent slightly forward, arms crossed in front of the chest and the chin
tucked in, in a high squat position.

32. Do not reach for the ground. Stepping back slightly, drop back, landing with the buttocks
first, then roll back executing the basic breakfall.

Figure 3-48: Back Breakfall Standing—Step 1

60 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-49: Back Breakfall Standing—Step 2

SECTION 7
FRONT BREAKFALLS

KNEELING

33. Kneel on the mat with toes pointing downward and buttocks on the heels (see Figures 3-
50 and 3-51). Hands are raised in front of the body at a slight angle, with palms facing forward
and hands cupped. Elbows are tucked in close to the body.

34. Fall forward, pushing the legs out straight, and land on the forearms, hands and toes.
Ensure that the head is turned left or the right to avoid smashing the face or chin on the ground.
Upon impact exhale air from the lungs. Knees, stomach and chest should not touch the mat.
Legs should be spread more than shoulder width apart to lower the centre of gravity.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 61
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-50: Front Breakfall Kneeling—Step 1

Figure 3-51: Front Breakfall Kneeling—Step 2

SQUATTING

35. Squat on the mat and fall forward (see Figures 3-52 and 3-53). Bring the hands in to
position in the air and perform the breakfall.

62 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-52: Front Breakfall Squatting—Step 1

Figure 3-53: Front Breakfall Squatting—Step 2

STANDING

36. Stand with feet about shoulder width apart, leap forward, and execute the breakfall (see
Figures 3-54 and 3-55).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 63
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-54: Front Breakfall Standing—Step 1

Figure 3-55: Front Breakfall Standing—Step 2

FORWARD ROLLS

37. The forward roll breaks a fall from an opponent’s attack and uses the momentum of the
roll to get back to the fighting stance. To execute the forward roll step forward with the right
foot and contact the ground with the back of the right forearm and upper arm. Tuck the chin in
to the chest. Roll over the right shoulder and diagonally across the back and left hip to the feet,
adopting the fighting stance once erect.

64 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

SECTION 8
SIDE BREAKFALLS

LYING

38. Lie on the back, chin to chest, left arm across the mid-section of the torso, right arm
across touching the left shoulder, palm facing out and legs raised off the mat (see Figures 3-56
and 3-57).

39. For the right breakfall, rotate the body to the right, striking the ground with the full extent
of the right arm and leg at about a 45 degree angle, palm downward. The left arm will come up
to protect the face, and the left knee is bent slightly to protect the groin. Ensure air is exhaled
during impact. All movements are carried out simultaneously.

40. The left breakfall is the exact opposite of the right breakfall.

Figure 3-56: Side Breakfall Lying—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 65
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-57: Side Breakfall Lying—Step 2

SQUATTING

41. To roll and execute a left breakfall roll over the right shoulder (see Figures 3-58 to 3-60).
Place the palm of the right hand on the mat with the fingers facing the body on the inside of the
left hand. Elbows should be slightly bent forming a wheel. Tuck the head in to the right arm,
looking under the left armpit. Raise the left knee off the ground and roll forward over the right
shoulder, landing on the left hip. Strike the ground with the legs and arms positioned as in the
lying position.

Figure 3-58: Side Breakfall Squatting—Start

66 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-59: Side Breakfall Squatting—Strike

Figure 3-60: Side Breakfall Squatting—Finish

STANDING

42. Place the hands as in the squatting position, but in front of the body to form a wheel (see
Figures 3-61 to 3-63). Tuck the head as in the squatting position, and take a pace forward with
the right leg. In the same motion lower the upper body, placing the hand on the ground inside
the right foot. Throw the left leg over the body, forcing the roll over the right shoulder and
ending in a left break fall.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 67
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 3-61: Side—Breakfall Standing—Start

Figure 3-62: Side—Breakfall Standing—Mid-point

68 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Throws, Takedowns and Breakfalls

Figure 3-63: Side—Breakfall Standing—Finish

43. Once rolls from the standing position have been practiced the movement will become
instinctive. Remember that the right roll is executed on the right foot and the left roll on the left
foot. In training it is important to consider the height of obstacles presented to the student,
making them progressively higher, but no obstacle should be higher than the waist.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 69
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 4
STRIKING TECHNIQUES AND COUNTERS

1. In close quarter combat many parts of the body can serve as weapons. Strikes can be
delivered with the hands, feet, and, in some instances, other parts of the body. Strikes can only
become effective and powerful weapons when strengthened through proper training. Soldiers
must know how to execute strikes effectively.

SECTION 1
LONG RANGE STRIKING TECHNIQUES

KICKING THEORY

2. Kicks are the natural long-range weapons of the soldier. They enable the soldier to strike
at targets from a distance, without compromising his defensive stance.

3. Kicks can be used offensively and defensively. They can be used for one powerful strike
or, in combination with other striking surfaces, to strike two or more of the opponent’s
vulnerable points.

4. Kicks should not be delivered above waist level unless the opponent is on the ground or
bent forward. The higher a kick is thrown, the greater probability it will be grabbed and the
intended offensive strike neutralized. A kick must always be executed with maximum speed, but
at the same time contain enough power to cause damage to the intended target area. Power is
achieved through keeping the supporting leg bent, and thrusting the hip and upper body forward
toward the intended striking surface.

5. The primary targets for kicks are the knees, groin, femoral nerve, peroneal nerve, tibial
nerve and shins. If the opponent is on the ground the soldier can aim for the head, spine,
kidneys, ribs and stomach; the soldier can also stomp on hands and other limbs. These are the
primary targets because of their susceptibility to serious and immediate damage. As an example
it takes approximately 25 kilograms of pressure to break the knee joint. Any soldier regardless
of size can generate the required amount of force. The groin is similarly vulnerable, as there are
no surrounding muscles and a strike here is excruciatingly painful.

6. The soldier must assess the distance to the target and the surrounding environment before
using kicks. If the target is too close the soldier must use techniques that apply at that range, or
the technique may be jammed or trapped. If the target is out of range the soldier can combine a
shifting or stepping technique combined with the kick. Also, if the environment is cluttered with
debris and other objects, the soldier must maintain a balanced stance and not strike with kicking
techniques.

7. Kicks can be executed from either the lead or rear leg depending on the circumstances.
Since the back leg is the more powerful of the two, it is the one most commonly used. After
executing the kick the leg must be immediately re-chambered (see paragraph 12) and a stable
stance readopted.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 71
Close Quarter Combat

BALANCE

8. When kicking, balance is of primary importance, as body weight is supported by only one
leg. This situation is aggravated at the instant the foot hits the target by the strong counter shock
of the kick. To counteract this shock, tighten the ankle of the supporting leg. Attempt to absorb
the shock with the ankle, knee and hip of the supporting leg, and keep the upper body well
balanced and perpendicular to the ground.

9. To achieve maximum effect, kick with the whole body instead of with the leg alone.
Pushing the hips forward during the kick helps achieve this.

10. Be sure to re-chamber the kicking foot quickly after completing the kick. This prevents
the opponent from catching it or sweeping your supporting leg. As soon as the foot is
withdrawn, it must be ready for the next attack. The soldier must carry his hands in the fighting
stance to ensure he has protection and that the hands are in position to strike.

METHODS OF DELIVERY

11. There are two basic methods for delivering a leg strike. The first is the snap kick, a
snapping and swinging movement of the foot. The second is the thrust kick, straightening the
knee and thrusting the foot outward and toward the target.

CHAMBERING THE LEG

12. Regardless of the type of kick to be executed the first action is chambering the leg. Bend
the knee of the kicking leg to its maximum extent. Begin by raising the knee of the kicking leg
as high as possible and bending the knee fully. This action is an important preliminary to
kicking. Practice lifting the knee also helps accustom the body to balancing on one leg, and aids
in learning the first part of the correct course of a kicking foot.

13. Part of the reason for bending the knee fully is to keep the weight of the kicking leg as
close as possible to the trunk. The kick has greater power if the leg is initially close to the body.
By bending the knee fully, better leverage is obtained for a quick and powerful kick.

14. During the kick, keep the supporting leg steady, with the knee slightly bent. If the knee is
bent too much, the leg muscle will have some difficulty supporting the body. The knee and
ankle will be loose, and it will be difficult to kick effectively. Be sure to bend the knee only
slightly, lean the leg slightly forward, tense the muscles of the leg, and keep the sole of the foot
firmly on the ground.

SNAP KICK

15. The snap kick can be delivered with the front or rear leg. Deliver the snap kick with a
strong snapping motion, beginning from the chambered position. The foot describes almost a
half circle during the kick.

72 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

16. In the snap kick (see Figures 4-1 to 4-5) balance is often poor because of the restricted
base provided by the supporting foot, and because the power of the kick is usually directed
upward. Return as quickly as possible to the fighting stance. Maximum speed is essential
executing the snap kick. A slow snap kick not only fails to create a powerful attack, but also
results in an unbalanced position and leaves the soldier vulnerable to foot traps.
17. To deliver the snap kick, chamber the leg, then quickly and powerfully tense the muscles
at the front of the thigh. This tension drives the foot outward. Strike the target with the toe of
the boot or top of the foot. When the leg is fully extended, relax the muscles at the front of the
thigh and tense those at the back to re-chamber the leg.
18. The kick from beginning to end is smooth, and there is no noticeable pause at the
moment of impact. This is because the muscles at the back of the thigh are stretched as the leg is
extended outward. A sudden release of tension in the front thigh muscles will immediately cause
those at the back to contract, automatically withdrawing the foot.

Figure 4-1: Snap Kick Front Leg—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 73
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-2: Snap Kick Front Leg—Step 2

Figure 4-3: Snap Kick Front Leg—Step 3

74 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-4: Snap Kick Front Leg—Step 4

Figure 4-5: Snap Kick Front Leg—Step 5

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 75
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-6: Snap Kick Rear Leg—Step 1

Figure 4-7: Snap Kick Rear Leg—Step 2

76 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-8: Snap Kick Rear Leg—Step 3

Figure 4-9: Snap Kick Rear Leg—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 77
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-10: Snap Kick Rear Leg—Step 5

ROUNDHOUSE KICK

19. The roundhouse kick (see Figures 4-11 to 4-13) is normally executed with the rear leg
and targets either the side of the knee, the peroneal nerve, or the femoral nerve.
20. Turn the lead foot outward, transferring the weight to the lead foot, and rotate the hips,
swinging the rear leg forward in a low arc to strike with the toe of the boot, the instep, or the
shin.
21. The motion of the rear leg is a dead leg swing. The snapping motion of the leg is
generated by the rotation of the hips and not the extension of the knee.

78 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-11: Roundhouse Kick

Figure 4-12: Roundhouse Kick—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 79
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-13: Roundhouse Kick—Step 2

THRUST KICKS

22. From the chambered position, a thrust kick can be aimed to the front or to the side. It can
be used to strike targets from shin to waist high on a standing opponent.
23. The foot travels the most direct course to the target. Keep the movement light and fast at
the start of the kick, but concentrate maximum power through the cutting edge of the heel at the
moment of impact.

24. A successful thrust kick depends on correct distancing and timing. If the foot hits the
target too soon or too late, the resulting reaction will push the foot back toward the kicker instead
of striking the target. This negative reaction is greatest when the foot hits the target with the leg
already fully extended but improperly focused.

FRONT THRUST KICK

25. With the front thrust kick (see Figures 4-14 to 4-17) the centre of gravity falls within the
base area of the supporting foot. This results in good balance and power from the forward
momentum of the body.
26. The leg is chambered and draws upward like the snap kick, however the hips drive
forward and the leg thrusts directly toward the target, striking with the ball of the foot.
27. If the centre of gravity falls outside the base area of the supporting foot, good balance is
still possible. Forward body momentum can strengthen your kick. The foot can easily snap
outward and upward toward the target. Moreover, kicking range is extended.
28. After striking the target, place the kicking foot on the ground in front of the supporting

80 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

foot, thereby easily maintaining balance. If necessary, it is also possible to return the kicking
foot to its initial position on the ground without balance displacement.

Figure 4-14: Front Thrust Kick—Step 1

Figure 4-15: Front Thrust Kick—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 81
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-16: Front Thrust Kick—Step 3

Figure 4-17: Front Thrust Kick—Step 4

SIDE THRUST KICK

29. The side thrust kick (see Figures 4-18 to 4-21) is effective striking from the shin to the
waist. It is a flexible technique that can attack in any direction, quickly delivering a powerful

82 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

kick that can be combined with movement techniques to close the distance. The striking surface
is the outside cutting edge of the heel.

30. Chamber the kicking leg and rotate the hips toward the target.

31. Thrust the foot of the kicking leg directly toward the target. Simultaneously turn the foot
of the supporting leg so the heel points to the target, and extend the hips to generate power.

Figure 4-18: Side Thrust Kick—Step 1

Figure 4-19: Side Thrust Kick—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 83
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-20: Side Thrust Kick—Step 3

Figure 4-21: Side Thrust Kick—Step 4

BACK KICK

32. The back kick (see Figures 4-22 to 4-25) is a thrust kick used to strike an opponent
advancing from the rear. The striking surface is the heel. Target areas are the pelvic area
immediately above the groin or the knees.

84 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

33. To execute a back kick chamber the leg. Look over the shoulder on the same side as the
leg you intend to strike with. Keeping the knees as close together as possible, kick out to the rear
in a straight line using the hips to generate power. Bend slightly at the waist. Re-chamber the
kicking leg and turn to face your opponent. Immediately re-adopt the fighting stance. It is
important that your supporting knee remains bent.

Figure 4-22: Back Kick—Step 1

Figure 4-23: Back Kick—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 85
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-24: Back Kick—Step 3

Figure 4-25: Back Kick—Step 4

SECTION 2
MID-RANGE STRIKING TECHNIQUES
34. Hand Strikes. Hand strikes may be thrown during any close quarter combat. Most
people resort to various forms of hand strikes because they are a natural reaction to a threat. The
purpose of hand strikes is to stun the opponent or to set him up for a follow-up or finishing
technique. Hand strikes can be delivered in many variations and combinations, including fists,

86 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

knife and ridge hands, heel of the palm, and hammer fist strikes to back hands. When striking
with the hand care must be taken selecting the type of strike compared to the type of target. For
example, soldiers should punch only soft tissue areas of the opponent, since striking something
harder than the hand, like the skull, risks injury. A well-placed punch, however, maximizes the
opponent’s damage while minimizing the risk of injury to the soldier.

35. Power Generation. Effective use of natural strength in any confrontation is important,
but muscle strength alone will accomplish very little. Power is achieved by combining
maximum force at the moment of impact with use of the entire weight of the body projected
through the striking surface to transfer energy to the target. Concentration of force also depends
greatly on the speed with which the technique is executed. The ultimate goal is to deliver a blow
with maximum speed and with maximum body weight behind the striking surface.

36. There is very little power in the striking arm alone, thus legs, hips, and shoulders must all
be used at once to create the power necessary to cause damage and incapacitate the opponent.
The hips have a critical effect on any striking technique; body mass must be moved forward or
backward in a straight line, and using the hips is the most effective way to transfer that mass to a
target. Power and speed is attained as follows (see Figure 4-26):

a. The calf and thigh muscles on the back of the leg tense and force the hips
forward.

b. The hips are then violently rotated forward.

c. Simultaneously power is transferred through the abdominal area to the chest and
the shoulder is thrust forward, the striking arm remaining closely aligned with the
shoulder on a straight path to the target. The opposite shoulder is forced back
thereby retracting the lead hand toward the hips.

Figure 4-26: Power Generation

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 87
Close Quarter Combat

37. Muscular Tension. It is crucial when executing hand strikes that the soldier stay
relaxed. The natural tendency in any fight is to tense up, which results in rapid fatigue and
decreased power. If the soldier remains relaxed during close quarter combat greater speed and
power will be generated. At the point of impact, clench the muscles to cause damage to the
opponent and avoid injury to the wrist and hand.

38. Hit, Strike and Follow-through. A strike must be delivered so that the striking surface
hits, remains on target, and follows through to cause maximum energy transfer. Strikes must be
executed so they drive through the target. Strikes on the opponent should occur with the arm
slightly bent, so that the arm extends as it moves through the target. Energy transfer is complete
once all forward momentum has stopped. The striking surface must then be drawn back to the
chambered position.

39. Movement. Movement puts the soldier in the proper position to attack and provides
protection. All forms of movement can be used for striking, and the direction will depend on the
angle of attack, position of the opponent, and exposed vulnerable points.

40. Telegraphing. Telegraphing a strike occurs when body movement warns the opponent
of the intention to attack. Staying relaxed helps to reduce telegraphing. Often, an untrained
fighter telegraphs his intentions by drawing the hands back, changing facial expression, tensing
neck muscles, or twitching. These movements, however small, immediately indicate an attack is
about to happen. An opponent who is a trained fighter may be able to evade or counter the
attack. An opponent who is untrained may still be able to minimize the effect of an attack. Note
however that the soldier can also use these types of telegraphing movements to deceive an
opponent and create openings.

PUNCHES

41. Punches generally are hand strikes delivered with a close fist, singly or with other strikes.
They can be executed using both the forward and rear hand, at mid- and close range.

STRAIGHT PUNCH

42. The straight punch is executed by the forward or lead hand. It is a fast punch designed to
keep distance from the opponent and to set up more powerful techniques. A straight punch
conceals movement and allows the soldier to close with the opponent. Straight punches should
strike soft tissue areas, however if the soldier strikes the head alternate hand strikes should be
used.

43. To execute the straight punch (see Figures 4-27 to 4-30) drive the lead hand directly to
the target using the full extension of the arm, while rotating the palm down. Release all
unnecessary tension from the arm and hand at the start of the technique, but concentrate the
power of the body and tense the muscles at the moment of impact.

88 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

44. Power for this technique is generated by slight forward rotation of the hip and rotation of
the striking arm. The rear hand pulls back tight to the body to assist this rotation, but stays high
to protect the head.

Figure 4-27: Straight Punch—Step 1

Figure 4-28: Straight Punch—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 89
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-29: Straight Punch—Step 3

Figure 4-30: Straight Punch—Step 4

REVERSE PUNCH

45. The reverse punch is delivered with the rear hand. It is a powerful punch intended to
cause maximum damage to the opponent. Power for this technique is generated from the
coordinated movement of all parts of the body.

90 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

46. To execute the reverse punch (see Figures 4-31 to 4-34) tense the muscles of the legs and
straighten the rear leg, which rotates the hips and upper body toward the target. The rear hand
drives straight out toward the target, rotating the palm down to nearly full extension. Shift the
body weight to the lead leg while pushing off the rear foot. Strike the target with the two striking
knuckles, striking and driving through the opponent, then immediately retract the arm to the
fighting stance.

Figure 4-31: Reverse Punch—Step 1

Figure 4-32: Reverse Punch—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 91
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-33: Reverse Punch—Step 3

Figure 4-34: Reverse Punch—Step 4

92 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

LUNGE PUNCH

47. The lunge punch is delivered at the end of a forward step. In moving forward the centre
of gravity shifts and the momentum of the body provides additional force, resulting in a powerful
blow.

48. To execute the lunge punch (see Figures 4-35 to 4-38) step forward with the rear foot,
which now becomes the lead foot in the fighting stance. At the same time, strike the target with
the forward hand, rotating the forward hip slightly to generate power. Thus if the step forward is
with the right foot, strike with the right hand.

49. If you fail to step forward quickly, the opponent may anticipate your attack and apply a
counter, or sweep your advancing foot to cause balance displacement. To prevent this, push the
hips forward by driving the supporting foot hard against the ground as you move ahead. Keep
the hips low and level. Do not raise the heel of the advancing foot, but slide it over the ground,
moving forward as smoothly and rapidly as possible. The strike must be executed immediately
on placing the forward foot.

Figure 4-35: Lunge Punch—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 93
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-36: Lunge Punch—Step 2

Figure 4-37: Lunge Punch—Step 3

94 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-38: Lunge Punch—Step 4

HEEL PALM STRIKES

50. Heel palm strikes are powerful and flexible strikes that are suitable for both soft and hard
targets. This technique can be delivered straight forward or from the opponent’s outside, and can
be used at both mid- and close range. The main targets for this strike are the brachial plexus,
chin and occipital nerve.

51. To execute a heel palm strike (see Figures 4-39 and 4-40) bend the wrist of the striking
hand at a 90 degree angle. From this point the strike is delivered in the same manner as a punch,
or, in the case of a brachial strike, as a straight-arm swing.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 95
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-39: Heel Palm Strike

Figure 4-40: Heel Palm Strike

HAMMER FIST

52. Striking with the hammer fist concentrates power through a small part of the hand which,
transferred to the target, can have a devastating effect. The striking surface of the hammer fist is
the meaty portion of the hand below the little finger, which handles the shock of striking well

96 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

and is a good surface against hard targets. This technique is effective for cutting through a
target, and can be delivered downward, like striking with a hammer, to a target behind the
soldier. The main targets for this strike are the suprascapular nerve, median nerve, radial nerve,
occipital nerve, nose, brachial nerve, and groin.

53. To execute the hammer fist (see Figures 4-41 and 4-42) make a fist and bend the arm at
approximately a 45 to 90 degree angle. At the same time, rotate the hip and shoulder of the hand
being used rearward.

54. Thrust the fist forward at the opponent while rotating the hip and shoulder forward.
Rotate the wrist so the hammer fist strikes the opponent.

Figure 4-41: Hammer Fist

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 97
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-42: Hammer Fist

KNIFE HAND/RIDGEHAND

55. The knife hand is one of the most versatile and devastating strikes, and can be executed
with either hand. The striking surface is the cutting edge of the hand, which is the meaty portion
of the hand below the little finger extending to the top of the wrist. The striking surface is
narrow, allowing strikes on the neck between an opponent’s body armour and helmet. The knife
hand strike is executed from one of three angles, either outside, inside or downward. The
execution of the ridge hand is the same as the knife hand, however, the hand is positioned with
the knuckles upward and the wrist bent, forming a straight line from the bottom knuckle of the
thumb to the elbow. The striking surface is the bottom knuckle of the thumb to the wrist.

56. Execute a knife hand (see Figures 4-43 to 4-45) by extending and joining the fingers of
the striking hand, placing the thumb next to the forefinger. Retract the striking hand, at the same
time rotating the hips. Thrust the knife hand forward to the target while rotating the hip and
shoulder to generate power.

98 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-43: Outside Knife Hand

Figure 4-44: Outside Ridge Hand

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 99
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-45: Downward Knife Hand

SECTION 3
CLOSE RANGE TECHNIQUES

HEAD BUTT

57. The head can be used as a close range weapon. Striking surfaces are the top of the
forehead or the back of the head. This technique is very effective, especially when wearing a
helmet. This technique must be delivered with a tensed neck, and power must be generated from
the torso and not the neck alone. For this strike to be effective the soldier must ensure that the
target is braced so it absorbs maximum force.

UPPERCUT

58. The uppercut is a powerful close range punch originating below the opponent’s line of
vision. It is executed with the hand in an upward motion, traveling up the centreline of the
opponent’s body. It is delivered in close and can be followed by other striking techniques. The
target area is the opponent’s jaw. This technique can render the opponent unconscious, cause
extensive damage to the neck, or sever the tongue.

59. To execute the uppercut (see Figures 4-46 to 4-48) bend the arms, rotating the palms
inward. The distance the arms bend depends on the range to the target. Rotate the hips and
shoulders forcefully toward the opponent, thrusting the fist straight up toward the opponent’s
chin or jaw. Strike the target with the two fixed knuckles of the fist and immediately re-adopt
the fighting stance.

100 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-46: Upper Cut—Step 1

Figure 4-47: Upper Cut—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 101
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-48: Upper Cut—Step 3

HOOK

60. The hook is a powerful close range technique which attacks the opponent to the outside,
targeting the head, ribs or kidneys.

61. To execute the hook (see Figures 4-49 and 4-50) drive the arm in a hooking motion
toward the target, keeping the elbow bent while forcefully rotating the hips to generate power.
Use the power from the hips and not the arm. The arm should be held firmly at the appropriate
height with a 90 degree bend.

62. Strike the opponent with the fixed knuckles of the fist. Continue rotating the hips and
shoulders, driving through the target. Immediately re-adopt the fighting stance.

102 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-49: Hook Punch—Step 1

Figure 4-50: Hook Punch—Step 2

EYE GOUGE

63. The eye gouge is used to attack an opponent’s eyes, blinding him to set up other
techniques. The striking surface is the tips of the fingers or thumbs, delivered with either hand.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 103
Close Quarter Combat

64. To execute the eye gouge (see Figure 4-51) extend the striking hand with the fingers
slightly spread apart and bent to allow entry in to the eye sockets. With the palm of the hand
down, thrust the striking hand forward in to the opponent’s eyes. Aim the hand at the opponent’s
nose level so the fingers or thumb slide naturally in to the grooves of the opponent’s eye sockets.

Figure 4-51: Eye Gouge

ELBOW STRIKES

65. The elbow is a powerful weapon that can strike targets from various angles at close
range. Elbow strikes work on two planes, the vertical and horizontal. The striking surface is 5
centimetres above or below the point of the elbow, depending on the angle of delivery and the
direction of the target. Elbow strikes can be executed from either arm while standing or on the
ground. The elbow is the second hardest striking surface of the body and is an excellent weapon
for striking hard targets.

VERTICAL ELBOW STRIKES

66. To execute the vertical elbow strike upward (see Figure 4-52) bend the elbow of the rear
hand, keeping the fist close to the body. Thrust the elbow vertically upward toward the opponent
while rotating the rear arm, shoulder and hip forward to generate power. Strike the opponent
with the forearm 5 centimetres below the point of the elbow. The target for this strike is the jaw.

67. To execute a vertical elbow strike downward (see Figure 4-53) straighten the striking arm
so the elbow is elevated to approximately eye level. Drive the arm down bending the elbow,
keeping it close to the body, while dropping the body weight to generate power. Strike the target

104 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

with the triceps 5 centimetres above the point of the elbow. The main targets for this strike are
the back of the neck or suprascapular.

68. To execute the vertical elbow strike rearward (see Figure 4-54) fully extend the striking
arm forward, palm down. Drive the striking arm straight back, keeping it close to the body while
simultaneously rotating the hand palm down. Use the rotation of the hips and upper body to
generate power for this strike. The main targets for this strike are the vulnerable points of the
torso.

69. To execute the vertical elbow strike rear upward (see Figure 4-55) start in the same
manner as the rearward strike. On driving the arm backward the opposite shoulder drops
forward and the striking elbow is directed up toward the opponent’s head. The striking surface is
5 centimetres above the elbow. This strike targets the jaw and throat area. To employ this
technique space has to be created so the arm will move easily between the soldier and his
opponent.

Figure 4-52: Vertical Elbow—Strike Upward

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 105
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-53: Vertical Elbow—Strike Downward

Figure 4-54: Vertical Elbow—Strike Rearward

106 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-55: Vertical Elbow Strike—Rear Upward

HORIZONTAL ELBOW STRIKES

70. To execute a horizontal elbow strike forward (see Figure 4-56) tuck the fist of the striking
arm near the chest, with the palm facing down. Drive the elbow of the striking arm forward
toward the target with the forearm parallel to the ground. Strike the opponent with the forearm 5
centimetres below the point of the elbow. The hips generate power similar to a straight or
reverse punch.

71. To execute the horizontal elbow strike rearward (see Figure 4-57) tuck the fist of the
striking arm near the chest with the palm facing down. At the same time, rotate the shoulder and
hip of the arm being used forward. Drive the elbow of the striking arm horizontally rearward
toward the target. The forearm is parallel to the ground and the hand drives toward the direction
of the attack. Rotate the hip and shoulder of the arm being used backward to generate power.
The targets for this strike are the head, neck and vulnerable points on the torso.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 107
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-56: Horizontal Elbow—Strike Forward

Figure 4-57: Horizontal Elbow—Strike Rearward

KNEE STRIKES

72. Knee strikes are a close range technique. The knee can be delivered forward and in a
roundhouse fashion. It is effective in clinch situations and as an entry technique in counter
attacking. The knee generates power at short range, and its effectiveness is increased when

108 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

striking a braced target or a target pulled toward the knee. The power for knee strikes is
generated from rotating the hips or driving them upward. Due to the close proximity of
combatants knee strikes are delivered from the rear leg, and the soldier may have to step back
with the striking leg to strike with power. The main striking surface for the knee is 5 centimetres
above the knee on the thigh. Its main targets are the legs, groin, hips or, if the opponent is bent
over or on the ground, the torso and head area.

FORWARD KNEE STRIKE

73. To execute the forward knee strike (see Figures 4-58 and 4-59) drive the leg forward to
the chambered position and continue using the hip to drive the knee forward and upward in to the
target. As the leg drives forward pull the opponent in. This strike can be delivered from the
escort position (see Chapter 6, paragraph 12).

Figure 4-58: Knee Strike to the Head—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 109
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-59: Knee Strike to the Head—Step 2

HORIZONTAL KNEE STRIKE

74. The horizontal knee strike (see Figure 4-60) is executed with the leg generally parallel to
the ground, using the hips to generate power. Its main target is the peroneal nerve. The striking
surface is the front of the leg, slightly above or below the knee. The leg is delivered in a similar
fashion as a roundhouse kick, however the lower portion of the leg is retracted.

Figure 4-60: Horizontal Knee Strike

110 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

STOMP KICK

75. Stomp kicks target the opponent’s limbs, torso and head. It is effective when counter
attacking, or when your opponent is on the ground. The stomp kick is delivered from an upright
and balanced stance, and can be executed from either foot. The striking surface is the cutting
edge of the heel.

76. To execute the stomp kick (see Figure 4-61) chamber the leg, then drive the heel down to
the target by straightening the leg and pushing the hips slightly forward. The foot must be
positioned with the toes curled back so the cutting surface of the heel strikes the target. Keep the
supporting leg slightly bent at the knee to assist balance and power generation.

Figure 4-61: Stomp Kick

SECTION 4
DEFENSIVE AND COUNTER-ATTACK TECHNIQUES
77. In close quarter combat soldiers will instinctively react defensively to threats. In order to
effectively block and counter techniques, soldiers need to take defensive action based on such
instinctive reactions.

78. Against striking attacks two forms of defensive techniques are employed, parrying and
blocking. Parrying techniques are soft blocks executed from an open hand to parry or trap the
strike. Blocks are used to absorb the shock of an attack through the muscles of the body. Both
parrying and blocking can be combined with movement to bring the soldier off the line of attack
or to assist in absorbing the shock. With both defensive techniques the soldier is in a position to
counter-attack, and must do so immediately to gain the advantage.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 111
Close Quarter Combat

79. When parrying a technique the soldier needs to move the attack offline, i.e. to a point
where the opponent’s technique will not strike the soldier. This is done by parrying with the
hands or arms and rotating the body. Taking an attack offline is of the utmost importance when
dealing with an armed opponent.

CLOSING THE DISTANCE

80. In any close quarter combat the soldier has to close the distance to the opponent to
neutralize or control him. Once the distance to the opponent has been closed throws, takedowns,
chokes or other techniques can be used. When closing with the opponent the soldier can either
work to the opponent’s inside or outside positions. A key factor in closing the distance is the
type of attacks that the soldier must defend against. If the technique is delivered from the
outside, such as a hook punch or wild punch, the soldier can close as the strike is being
delivered. However, if the strikes are coming hard and fast inside the soldier has close the
distance in the brief pauses between strikes. When closing the soldier must be prepared to deal
with other threats.

LEAD AND REAR HAND PARRIES

81. The lead and rear hand parries are employed against attacks that are moving directly
toward the soldier, and can be used with the hand in its normal position or rotated to the outside.
These techniques allow the soldier to take multiple hand strikes offline quickly and close the
distance, or move to the opponent’s outside.

82. To execute the parry (see Figures 4-62 to 4-65) use the hand which is the mirror image of
the opponent’s strike, i.e. if the opponent strikes with his right hand parry with the left hand.
Parry by rotating the shoulders and hips in the direction of the punch, using either an open or
closed hand to deflect the opponent’s strike laterally or downward, to the point where the attack
is taken offline. Both elbows remain close to the body.

112 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-62: Inside Lead Hand Parry

Figure 4-63: Inside Rear Hand Parry

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 113
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-64: Outside Lead Hand Parry

Figure 4-65: Outside Rear Hand Parry

HOOK BLOCK

83. The hook block is used to counter a hook punch. To execute the block (see Figures 4-66
and 4-67) bend the blocking arm so that the hand and wrist are against the side of the head, the
elbow is pointing at the opponent, and the upper arm is parallel to the ground.

114 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-66: Hook Block—(Front View)

Figure 4-67: Hook Block—(Side View)

HIGH GUARD

84. The high guard is used to defend against high roundhouse kicks delivered from waist to
head height, uppercuts, and elbow strikes. The high guard (see Figure 4-68) is executed by
bringing the hands and elbows close together, forming a triangle to absorb the impact, and by

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 115
Close Quarter Combat

pivoting the body in to the direction of the attack. The blocking surface is the bottom of the
forearm.

Figure 4-68: High Guard

LOWER BLOCK

85. The lower block defends against kicks delivered in a straight-line. To execute the block
(see Figure 4-69) chamber the blocking arm so the hand is positioned by the opposite shoulder
and the elbow is close to the centre of the chest. Drive the blocking arm down at a 45 degree
angle from the body, using the outside of the forearm to deflect the strike to the outside.

116 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-69: Lower Block

LEG BLOCK

86. The leg block is used to block low kicks, and leaves the hands in a position to protect the
head and to counter punch. To execute the block (see Figure 4-70) chamber the leg on the
attacking side with the toe pointing downward. Absorb the kick on the outside of the calf.

Figure 4-70: Leg Block

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 117
Close Quarter Combat

DOUBLE HIGH BLOCKS

87. The double high block is used to close with the opponent, driving him back and causing
balance displacement. This block is executed when the opponent attacks from the outside with a
swinging attack like a hook punch or a baseball bat style swing. There are various hand
positions used depending on the type of attack and the reaction time available. This technique
must be combined with forward movement to hit the opponent hard and absorb the shock of
attack. This technique protects the jaw and throat, using the hands and keeping the chin down.

88. To execute double high block option 1 (see Figures 4-71 and 4-72) shift or step forward,
bending the lead arm as per the hook block. The other arm is positioned across the front of the
face, with the hand on the opposite biceps protecting the chin. The points of the elbow should
target the throat and the opponent’s upper arm.

Figure 4-71: Double High Block 1

118 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-72: Double High Block 1

89. To execute double high block option 2 (see Figures 4-73 and 4-74) shift or step forward,
bringing both arms up and over the opponent’s shoulder. This is done if reaction time is very
short. Once the technique is complete quickly gain control of the opponent’s head.

Figure 4-73: Double High Block 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 119
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 4-74: Double High Block 2

90. To execute double high block option 3 (see Figures 4-75 and 4-76) shift or step forward,
bringing the lead arm up and over the opponent’s shoulder. The opposite hand is used to strike
the opponent’s eyes, or to grab or strike the throat.

Figure 4-75: Double High Block 3

120 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Striking Techniques and Counters

Figure 4-76: Double High Block 3

DEFENCE AGAINST HEAD BUTTS

91. The head butt can be countered by keeping the head in tight to the opponent’s head,
reducing the space required to execute the technique.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 121
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 5
CHOKES AND COUNTERS TO COMMON ATTACKS/CHOKES

All techniques in this chapter are described for a right-handed soldier. However, all
techniques can be executed from either side.

WARNING

Never apply a choke for more than 5 seconds during training or practice the technique
at full speed. Close supervision of all trainees is necessary to maintain safety.

1. A properly applied choke may render an opponent unconscious in as little as 5 to 12


seconds. Chokes may be used by anyone regardless of size or gender. Chokes do not take great
strength as the weight of the opponent is used to the soldier’s advantage.

SECTION 1
CHOKES
2. There are two types of chokes, air and blood. An air choke prevents air from reaching
the lungs, while a blood choke affects blood flow to the brain. Both result in unconsciousness
and death if applied long enough.

AIR CHOKE

3. An air choke applies pressure to the opponent’s trachea (windpipe), preventing air from
reaching the lungs. This choke also causes a high degree of pain. An air choke results in
unconsciousness in 2 to 3 minutes. Due to the length of time required, this is not the ideal
technique to immobilize an opponent quickly.

4. The air choke also has the potential to create an adrenalin rush in the opponent, which
can trigger the sympathetic nervous system to activate the flight or fight response. Adrenalin
secretion in the body enhances pain tolerance and increases strength. This causes a survival
stress phenomenon, where the opponent has the perception of being choked to death but is still
able to endure high levels of pain.

5. Air chokes are considered deadly force and will only be applied at Level 5 of the
continuum of force (see Chapter 1 paragraph 6).

BLOOD CHOKE

6. A blood choke applies forearm/wrist and bicep/deltoid pressure to the sides of the neck.
Control is established by blood body compression and may result in unconsciousness in 5 to 10
seconds. Death may result when pressure is maintained for a longer period.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 123
Close Quarter Combat

7. Blood choke control is gained through venous compression. The internal jugular vein
lies parallel to the carotid artery and transports blood from the brain to the heart for re-
oxygenation. Both jugular veins are connected to the superior vena cava system, the network of
vessels that bring blood back to the right side of the heart. Arteries, which are thicker and
tougher, are much more difficult to compress than veins, which are thinner. Venous
compression results in congestion of the blood bodies in the head and neck, and causes blood to
pool in the brain.

8. Blood chokes have less injury potential than air chokes, however the side choke is the
only choke that will be applied at Level 4 of the continuum of force. (As mentioned earlier, all
air chokes are Level 5 techniques.)

GRIPS

9. There are two basic grips used in chokes and holds. The type of hold and individual
preference determines the method used. The main grip employed for chokes is the four-finger
grip (see Figure 5-1), however if the soldier has sweaty hands or a weak grip a three-finger grip
can be used. The three-finger grip can be applied two ways (see Figures 5-2 and 5-3), either
hooking the pinkie finger between the middle and index finger, or hooking the thumb between
the middle and index finger.

Figure 5-1: Four-finger Grip

124 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-2: Three-finger Grip—Version 1

Figure 5-3: Three-finger Grip—Version 2

FRONT CHOKE

10. The front choke (see Figure 5-4) is a blood choke executed facing the opponent, either
standing or on the ground. Grasp the opponent’s collar on both sides, with the middle knuckles
of the fingers touching the carotid artery on both sides of the neck. Using the collar for leverage,
pivot the hands toward the centre of the neck while drawing the elbows in. Use the thumbs to
apply additional pressure to the opponent’s windpipe.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 125
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-4: Front Choke

CROSS COLLAR CHOKE

11. The cross collar choke (see Figures 5-5 to 5-7) is a blood choke using the opponent’s
shirt collar as a mechanical means to apply pressure. This technique is best applied when the
opponent is braced against a wall or the ground. Place the right hand in a thumb out grip as far
back as possible inside the opponent’s right collar. Bend the opponent slightly forward, using a
distraction technique if necessary, placing the left arm under the right arm and the hand inside
the opponent’s collar. Once the hands are secure in the collar the forearms will form an X. To
apply pressure pull the elbows of both hands down to the hips, simultaneously rotating the
forearms so the thumbs of both hands turn in against the neck. The soldier must also step back to
increase pressure and avoid counter strikes.

Figure 5-5: Cross Collar Choke—Step 1

126 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-6: Cross Collar Choke—Step 2

Figure 5-7: Cross Collar Choke—Step 3

TRACHEA CHOKE

12. The trachea choke (see Figure 5-8) is an air choke designed to destroy the opponent’s
windpipe. Grip the opponent’s windpipe in an all round grasp. To apply pressure squeeze the
windpipe as hard as possible, simultaneously twisting the neck. For this choke the target must be
braced.

13. An alternate grip can also be used to apply pressure to the throat (see figure 5-10). Place
the thumb high against the trachea and reach around the neck, pushing the fingers as far back as
possible, then squeeze thumb and fingers together.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 127
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-8: Trachea Choke

Figure 5-9: Trachea Choke Alternate Grip

REAR CHOKES

14. Rear chokes are applied approaching the opponent from tactical position 3. They can be
applied either as a blood choke or air choke. This form of choke is effective for sentry removal.
In all cases the soldier must keep his hands tight to the neck on the initial application so the
opponent does not have a chance to react before the grip is fully applied. The soldier must also
step back to use an opponent’s weight against him, while applying forward pressure with the

128 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

shoulders. When fighting a taller opponent step on the back of his leg to lower his centre of
gravity just before the arms encircle the neck.

REAR CHOKE 1

15. Rear choke 1 (see Figures 5-10 to 5-12) is an air choke. Approach the opponent from
tactical position 3. Place the left hand around the left side of the opponent’s head, keeping it
close to the neck. Slip the hand in front of the throat, with the bony portion of the forearm
against the trachea. Simultaneously, reach with the right hand across the right shoulder, grasping
the left hand in a four-finger grip with the right palm up, and the right forearm positioned
vertically against the opponent’s back. Tightly position the head against the opponent’s head.

16. To apply pressure pull the left hand back in to the throat, assisted by the right hand. As
the pressure is applied, the left hand rotates or scoops up to a thumbs up position, causing greater
pressure and increasing the pain. Step back to arc the opponent‘s back, then drop him to the
ground. Once on the ground place maximum weight on the back of the opponent’s head.

Figure 5-10: Rear Choke 1—Step 1

Figure 5-11: Rear Choke 1—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 129
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-12: Rear Choke 1—Side View

REAR CHOKE 2

17. Rear choke 2 (see Figures 5-13 and 5-14) is a blood choke. Approach the opponent from
tactical position 3. Place the left hand around the left side of the opponent’s head, keeping it
close to the neck. Slip the arm around the neck until the elbow is in line with the point of the
opponent’s chin. Simultaneously, reach with the right hand across the right shoulder, grasping
the left hand in a four-finger grip with the right palm up, and the right forearm positioned
vertically against the opponent’s back. Tightly position the head against the opponent’s head.

18. Apply pressure with the biceps and forearm on both sides of the neck, pulling the left
hand in with the right hand and drawing the right arm in.

Figure 5-13: Rear Choke 2—Step 1

130 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-14: Rear Choke 2—Step 2

REAR CHOKE 3

19. Rear choke 3 (see Figures 5-15 and 5-16) is a blood choke. Approach the opponent from
tactical position 3. Rear choke 3 uses a figure four hold with the arms. Position the left arm as
described for rear choke 2. To apply the figure four hold position the right arm on the right
shoulder of the opponent and with the left hand grasp the right bicep. Then place the right hand
on the back of the opponent’s head near the top of the skull.

20. To apply pressure force the opponent’s head forward and down with the right arm,
assisted by the head, and squeeze both elbows together.

Figure 5-15: Rear Choke 3—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 131
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-16: Rear Choke 3—Step 2

SIDE CHOKE

NOTE
The side choke is the only choke used at level 4 of the continuum of force

21. The side choke is a blood choke, but differs from previous chokes in that pressure is only
applied to one side of the opponent’s neck. This technique is flexible, as the soldier can apply it
quickly from any tactical position and various ground positions. It is particularly effective as an
enhanced pain compliance technique in situations where deadly force is not authorized. This
choke easily controls the opponent, using varying degrees of effort as follows:

a. Level 2 side control, but no compression;

b. Level 3 mechanical compression until pain forces opponent compliance; and

c. Level 4 compression which causes unconsciousness.

22. To apply this technique from tactical position 2½ (see Figures 5-17 to 5-20) forcefully
drive the right arm under the opponent’s right arm and across his chest. Execute a brachial stun
and end with the inside of the wrist just below the right angle of the jaw. This movement will
place the opponent’s arm straight above his head. The right elbow should be centred on the
opponent’s sternum and the palm of the hand should be down. The left hand is then brought
palm up to grasp the right wrist. The head is then placed against the back of the opponent’s
head, neck or shoulder.

23. To apply pressure lock the head in position and push down on the sternum with the right
elbow, simultaneously rotating the bony portion of the forearm against the neck, pulling the right
hand across and down at a 45 degree angle. Then take the opponent to the ground by stepping
back with the left leg and dropping to the right knee.

132 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

24. Once resistance has stopped place the opponent face down and move to a rear tactical
position (see chapter 6). When this technique has been used and the opponent is unconscious the
soldier must adopt tactical position 2 with only one knee on the opponent’s back. Control is
essential since the opponent will regain consciousness within 5 to 30 seconds. Once revived he
may not realize what has happened or that he were unconscious, and may attempt to resume the
fight.

Figure 5-17: Side Choke—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 133
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-18: Side Choke—Step 2

Figure 5-19: Side Choke—Step 3

134 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-20: Side Choke—Step 4

25. To apply this technique from the inside position use a distraction, e.g. a kick to the shin
or knee. Then using the left arm drive the opponent’s right arm up, clearing the path to tactical
position 2. While moving to tactical position 2 the right arm encircles the opponent’s neck and
the right shoulder is driven up to pin the opponent’s arm. From this point apply the choke as
previously described.

GUILLOTINE CHOKE

26. The guillotine choke is an air choke. It starts from a front headlock position (see Figures
5-21 and 5-22). With the opponent’s head on the right side of the body, and the right arm
forming the headlock, place the hardened portion of the forearm against the opponent’s throat
and either grab the right hand in a four-finger grip or grasp the wrist in an overhand grasp.

27. To apply pressure snap the opponent’s head to the centre of the chest and stand up,
pushing the hips forward slightly. This pushes the opponent’s chin to the chest. The arms then
pull up against the throat and the right hand rotates to a palm down position.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 135
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-21: Guillotine Choke—Step 1

Figure 5-22: Guillotine Choke—Step 2

136 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

SECTION 2
COUNTERS TO COMMON ATTACKS
28. In most close quarter combat an opponent’s attack will either begin or end in a basic
hold. The soldier must possess the skills to counter these attacks. A systematic, five stage
approach is used to deal with this threat. Even though the opponent may cease his attack during
any part of the attack, continue the counter-attack until the opponent is controlled or neutralized.
The five stages to the counter-attack are:

a. Assessment. Recognize the threat and determine the response. At this stage the
opponent may still be closing with the soldier, who should be looking for signs
that indicate intent, or the soldier may be decisively engaged.

b. Entry. Launch the attack with techniques to distract the opponent to create
space/openings. Also strike the opponent’s vulnerable points to cause damage
and gain the advantage.

c. Establish Control. Use throws, takedowns and holds. This stage is complete
once the opponent is under control.

d. Follow-up. Use further strikes to subdue the opponent, or apply holds or locks.

e. Re-assessment. Continue to maintain control of the opponent and monitor the


surrounding area, e.g. remain alert for concealed weapons, counter-attacks, or
further opponents that must be dealt with.

29. A counter-attack is simply a combination of all the techniques the soldier knows. The
soldier must react instinctively and never give up. Successful application of these techniques
means that the soldier can deal with the threat and walk away.

FOLLOW-UP TECHNIQUES

30. Ideally the soldier will end in control with his opponent at his feet. Depending on the
situation the soldier will now control the opponent from a rear tactical position and secure him,
or carry out further offensive action to destroy him.

31. The soldier has various follow-up options:

a. hand strike to the groin, throat and head;

b. kicks and stomps to the limbs, ribs, spine and head;

c. strikes or locks applied to the shoulder, elbow, wrist and fingers, to the point of
joint destruction; and

d. chokes or weapons techniques to kill the opponent.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 137
Close Quarter Combat

HEADLOCKS

32. The headlock is a very common attack and can take many forms, whether standing or on
the ground. This hold may also be combined with striking techniques. In many situations the
opponent will hit hard causing balance displacement. The soldier can easily counteract this by
stepping forward to tactical position 2.

SIDE HEAD LOCK

33. To counter a side headlock (see Figures 5-23 to 5-30) enter with a ridgehand strike to the
groin, with either or both hands. Trap the opponent’s wrist with an overhand grasp with the right
hand. Reach up with the left hand and deliver multiple occipital strikes. The left hand then
swings around and grasps the face, with the thumb on the hypoglossal nerve and the middle
finger against the infra orbital nerve.

34. Then stand up, forcing the hips forward to arc the opponent’s back to the point of balance
displacement. Further softening techniques to the groin or solar plexus can be applied. Next
execute a hammer fist to the throat or brachial plexus strike while forcing the opponent’s head
back. Simultaneously with the strike step back with the left leg, taking the opponent to the
ground. Circle backward as the opponent drops, so that once on the ground the opponent will be
at the soldier’s feet and in position for follow-up techniques.

Figure 5-23: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 1

138 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-24: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 2

Figure 5-25: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 139
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-26: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 4

Figure 5-27: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 5

140 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-28: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 6

Figure 5-29: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 7

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 141
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-30: Counter to Side Headlock—Step 8

SIDE HEADLOCK WITH PUNCHING

35. To counter a side headlock with punching (see Figures 5-31 to 5-38) turn the forehead in
to the opponent and reach across with both hands, grabbing the shoulder of the punching arm.
Slide both hands downward, trapping and squeezing the tricep. The left hand then releases the
arm and delivers multiple occipital strikes. From this point carry on as described for the side
headlock.

Figure 5-31: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 1

142 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-32: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 2

Figure 5-33: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 143
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-34: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 4

Figure 5-35: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 5

144 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-36: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 6

Figure 5-37: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 7

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 145
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-38: Counter to Punching Side Headlock—Step 8

FRONT HEADLOCK

36. To counter a front headlock (see Figures 5-39 to 5-41) grasp the opponent’s forearm with
the outside hand to prevent a choke. Then enter with a right ridgehand strike to the groin,
immediately followed with an elbow strike to the head. Step through with the right foot and
stand straight up in to the opponent’s arm, maintaining control of the opponent’s wrist. From
here the hold will be broken but the soldier will still not have total control, so must continue to
fight and gain control.

Figure 5-39: Counter to Front Headlock—Step 1

146 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-40: Counter to Front Headlock—Step 2

Figure 5-41: Counter to Front Headlock—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 147
Close Quarter Combat

BEAR HUGS

37. The bear hug is a basic hold where the opponent has a two-hand grasp around the body.
This can be either from the front or rear, with the grip over or under the arms. In many cases the
opponent will drive in hard and lift the soldier. If this occurs target the opponent’s legs, striking
with the boot heels or knees.

OVERHAND REAR BEAR HUG

38. To counter an overhand rear bear hug (see Figures 5-42 to 5-47) immediately drop the
centre of gravity by widening the stance with the left leg. Drive up, attempting a head butt
and/or a foot stomp. Shoot the arms straight out and up, shrugging the shoulders. This will
bring the opponent’s arms up and over the soldier’s shoulders, creating space. Once the opening
is there deliver elbow strikes to the abdomen and hammer fists to the groin. Then execute a hip
throw and follow-up techniques.

Figure 5-42: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug

148 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-43: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug—Step 1

Figure 5-44: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 149
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-45: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug—Step 3

Figure 5-46: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug—Step 4

150 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-47: Counter to an Overhand Bear Hug—Step 5

UNDERHAND REAR BEAR HUG

39. To counter an underhand rear bear hug (see Figures 5-48 to 5-51) immediately drop the
centre of gravity by widening the stance with the left leg. Deliver an elbow strike to the
opponent’s head with the right hand, then immediately pivot to the left, striking with the elbow.
Continue until a blow has been delivered and the opponent is stunned. From here, wrap the right
arm around the opponent’s head, grab the triceps with the left arm, step in, and execute a head
throw. Once the opponent is on the ground execute follow-up techniques.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 151
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-48: Counter to Underhand Bear Hug—Step 1

Figure 5-49: Counter to Underhand Bear Hug—Step 2

152 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-50: Counter to Underhand Bear Hug—Step 3

Figure 5-51: Counter to Underhand Bear Hug—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 153
Close Quarter Combat

FRONT OVERHAND BEAR HUG

40. To counter a front overhand bear hug (see Figures 5-52 to 5-55) execute a head butt.
Grab the opponent’s hips and execute a knee strike to the groin. Shifting to the left, execute a
leg sweep takedown.

Figure 5-52: Counter to Front Overhand Bear Hug—Step 1

Figure 5-53: Counter to Front Overhand Bear Hug—Step 2

154 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-54: Counter to Front Overhand Bear Hug—Step 3

Figure 5-55: Counter to Front Overhand Bear Hug—Step 4

FRONT UNDER HAND BEAR HUG

41. To counter a front underhand bear hug use the same technique as the overhand counter,
or the option described in paragraph 42.

42. For an optional counter (see Figures 5-56 to 5-59) enter with heel palm strikes to the ears
or brachial plexus. Follow with an ocular strike with the thumb of the left hand to force the
opponent’s head back as far as possible, and with the right hand execute a hammer fist strike to
the throat. Simultaneously hook the left leg behind the opponent’s legs causing a takedown.
Continue to force back on the opponent’s head so it strikes the ground first. Unhook the left leg

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 155
Close Quarter Combat

before the opponent hits the ground to prevent injury. Once the opponent is on the ground apply
follow-up techniques.

Figure 5-56: Counter to Front Underhand Bear Hug—Step 1

Figure 5-57: Counter to Front Underhand Bear Hug—Step 2

156 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-58: Counter to Front Underhand Bear Hug—Step 3

Figure 5-59: Counter to Front Underhand Bear Hug—Step 4

FULL NELSON

43. The full nelson is a common wrestling move where the opponent brings both arms under
the soldier’s arms and clasps his hands behind the head. With this hold the soldier has to work
fast to counter the technique, as a skilled opponent can apply a choke or break the neck.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 157
Close Quarter Combat

COUNTERS TO FULL NELSON

44. As soon as the soldier feels the opponent’s arms coming under his, drop the centre of
gravity while driving the elbows to the hips and the head and shoulders back (see Figures 5-60 to
5-62). Now turn to the right to face the opponent, and deliver elbow and knee strikes. To gain
control use a leg sweep takedown or a turning throw. Once the opponent is on the ground apply
follow-up techniques.

Figure 5-60: Counter to Full Nelson—Step 1

Figure 5-61: Counter to Full Nelson—Step 2

158 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-62: Counter to Full Nelson—Step 3

COUNTERS TO WRIST GRABS

45. In low intensity situations quite often the soldier will have to deal with an opponent
attempting to grab an arm with either a single or double hand grab. The thumb is the weakest
part of the hand and is easily defeated. To counter any wrist grab the soldier works his arm in to
the opponent’s thumb.

ONE-HANDED WRIST GRAB

46. To counter the one-handed wrist grab (see Figures 5-63 and 5-64) drive the forearm
upward toward the opponent’s thumb. This will work regardless of how the opponent grabs.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 159
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-63: One-handed Wrist Grab

Figure 5-64: Counter to a One-handed Wrist Grab

LOW TWO-HANDED WRIST GRAB

47. To counter a low two-handed wrist grab (see Figures 5-65 to 5-67) reach between the
opponent’s hands, grabbing the trapped hand and working up toward the thumbs.

160 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-65: Low Two-handed Wrist Grab

Figure 5-66: Counter to a Low Two-handed Grab—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 161
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-67: Counter to a Low Two-handed Grab—Step 2

HIGH TWO-HANDED WRIST GRAB

48. To counter a high two-handed wrist grab (see Figures 5-68 to 5-70) reach between your
opponent’s hands, grabbing your hand and pulling downward.

Figure 5-68: High Two-handed Wrist Grab

162 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-69: Counter to a High Two-handed Wrist Grab—Step 1

Figure 5-70: Counter to a High Two-handed Wrist Grab—Step 2

SECTION 3
COUNTERS TO CHOKES
49. In close quarter combat a determined attacker will attempt a choke to kill or neutralize
the soldier. If the opponent correctly applies a choke the soldier will quickly loose
consciousness. Even if a choke is executed improperly it results in a hold where the opponent
has control, denying the soldier the ability to attack. Soldiers must escape chokes to regain the
tactical advantage.

50. A choke causes unconsciousness quickly. The first priority for the soldier is to protect
the throat. Immediately drop the chin to the chest to prevent the opponent’s arm from encircling
the neck, simultaneously using the hands to reach up and secure the opponent’s choking arm.

COUNTERS TO REAR CHOKES

51. Depending on the situation there are many options to counter rear chokes. The following
paragraphs describe three counter-attack variations.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 163
Close Quarter Combat

52. With counter 1, at the moment the opponent’s arm encircles the neck drop the chin and
grasp the choking arm with both hands (see Figures 5-71 to 5-73). Violently pull the opponent
forward and thrust upward with the hips, immediately executing a shoulder throw to the side
where the opponent attempted to apply the choke. Once the opponent is on the ground apply
follow-up techniques.

53. Smaller soldiers may find it easier to execute the throw by dropping the knee on the side
they are throwing to.

Figure 5-71: Rear Choke Counter 1—Step 1

164 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-72: Rear Choke Counter 1—Step 2

Figure 5-73: Rear Choke Counter 1—Step 3

54. For counter 2, tuck the chin and grab the arm with both hands (see Figures 5-74 to 5-76).
Turn in to the opponent, delivering elbow strikes to the chest, then knife hand strikes to the
groin. Step back with the left leg, moving to tactical position 2 and pulling the opponent’s arm
in. Once in tactical position 2 deal with the threat in the same manner as a side headlock. Once
the opponent is on the ground apply follow-up techniques

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 165
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-74: Rear Choke Counter 2—Step 1

Figure 5-75: Rear Choke Counter 2—Step 2

166 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-76: Rear Choke Counter 2—Step 3

55. Counter 3 applies to a rear choke where the opponent is dragging the soldier or has
stepped back to apply further pressure (see Figures 5-77 to 5-80). Immediately drop the chin and
grab the arm with both hands. Step back and to the outside of the side the choke is being applied
on to a pronounced fighting stance, while attempting to drop the upper body forward. From this
position drive the body as hard as possible to the outside, adopting a pronounced fighting stance
facing the opposite direction, simultaneously pulling the opponent’s arm to the chest while
bending forward slightly. Then execute a turning throw; pulling in on the trapped arm and
bending at the waist will assist the throw. Once the opponent is on the ground apply follow-up
techniques.

56. If the soldier is unable to execute the turning throw, strike with a ridgehand to the groin,
then the brachial plexus, while simultaneously executing a leg sweep takedown.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 167
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-77: Rear Choke Counter 3—Step 1

Figure 5-78: Rear Choke Counter 3—Step 2

168 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-79: Rear Choke Counter 3—Step 3

Figure 5-80: Rear Choke Counter 3—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 169
Close Quarter Combat

COUNTER TO FRONT CHOKES OR GRABS

57. In many situations an opponent will grab the soldier with one or two hands, either by the
throat or by using clothing and equipment. If an opponent has executed a grab or choke he are
within arms’ reach. At this distance use long range striking techniques to enter in to the counter
and break the hold, then close the distance with strikes, gain control, apply follow-up techniques,
and re-assess the situation. The techniques described in the following paragraphs demonstrate
some basic options.

COUNTER TO FRONT CHOKES OR GRABS—ONE HAND

58. To counter a one handed front choke (see Figures 5-81 to 5-83) grab the opponent’s
choking hand with the right hand. Keep the opponent’s hand in to the chest. Bend the left arm
so the tricep is parallel to the ground, and place it on the opponent’s forearm as close to the
wrist as possible. Turning the body to the right and stepping back with the right leg, turn the
opponent’s wrist so the pinkie is up, simultaneously applying downward pressure with the arm
against the forearm. This will cause a wrist pinch and pain compliance. The soldier can then
take the wrist to a reverse wristlock, and apply appropriate follow-up techniques.

Figure 5-81: Counter One-hand Choke—Step 1

170 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

Figure 5-82: Counter One-hand Choke—Step 2

Figure 5-83: Counter One-hand Choke—Step 3

COUNTER TO FRONT CHOKES—TWO HANDS

59. When an opponent lunges in and attacks the throat an instinctive reaction is to grab the
hands. To apply this as a counter (see Figures 5-84 and 5-85) grab the opponent’s hands/wrists
with both hands, pulling them apart to the outside in a plucking motion. This prevents the

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 171
Close Quarter Combat

opponent from applying the choke further. Immediately counter attack. Execute a snap kick to
the groin or a shin kick. Close the distance and strike with the elbows and knees. From this
entry gain control, follow up and re-assess.

Figure 5-84: Front Two-handed Choke

Figure 5-85: Front Two-handed Choke Counter (Plucking)

COUNTER TO A TWO HAND OR CROSS COLLAR CHOKE

60. This technique can be applied for either a two hand or cross-collar choke. This is also an
effective counter if the opponent is pushing backward or bracing the soldier against a wall. To
apply this counter (see Figures 5-86 to 5-89) immediately stop your rearward momentum by
turning the body back and to the right, stepping back with the right foot and driving the left arm
straight up. Brace the opponent’s upper arm with the right arm, driving the left elbow down on

172 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Chokes and Counter to Common Attacks/Chokes

to the opponent’s upper arm. Depending on the angle of the opponent’s arm this may break the
arm, but will at least help drop the opponent’s centre of gravity. Deliver hammer fist strikes to
the temple, brachial or face. Finally turn back to the opponent, close the distance, gain control,
follow up, and re-assess.

61. If braced against a wall the soldier will not be able to step back. In this case drive the left
side of the body forward and in to position.

Figure 5-86: Front Two-handed Choke Counter 1—Step 1

Figure 5-87: Front Two-handed Choke Counter 1—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 173
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 5-88: Front Two-handed Choke Counter 1—Step 3

Figure 5-89: Front Two-handed Choke Counter 1—Step 4

62. Another counter to the two-handed front choke or grab is to violently execute a palm heel
strike to the opponent’s chest upon first contact, and follow it up with other techniques such as a
snap kick to the groin, or a roundhouse kick to the peronial nerve.

174 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 6
NON-LETHAL TECHNIQUES

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. The Canadian Army’s involvement in operations other than war has greatly increased.
These operations require skills that span the spectrum of conflict and the continuum of force
described in Chapter 1.

2. How force is applied may affect a mission’s success or lead to unnecessary loss of human
life, damage to property, destruction of natural resources, or alienation of the local and
international public. Therefore commanders at all levels must be provided with clear direction
and orders that control the use of force. This direction is based on Canadian law, international
law, the law of armed conflict (LOAC), the inherent right of self-defence, and rules of
engagement (ROE).

3. Canadian Forces personnel are always entitled to use force, up to and including deadly
force, in self-defence, defence of Canadian Forces personnel and Canadian Forces units in peace,
conflict or war. In some circumstances, even in times of peace, Canadian Forces personnel may
be entitled to protect others and, in some international operations, property.

4. ROE are orders and direction originating from the Chief of Defence Staff regarding the
use of force in peacetime, periods of tension, and armed conflict. They are lawful commands
designed to remove any legal or semantic ambiguity that could lead commanders or troops under
their command to violate national or coalition policy by inadvertently under reacting or
overreacting to an action by foreign forces. Military, political, diplomatic, and legal factors are
all reviewed when considering ROE. ROE can also be used to provide direction on when force
can be used to protect larger national interests, defend against larger scale attacks on an
operational or strategic level, or protect other foreign forces or non-military individuals. ROE
will be tailored for each operation and may change as the tactical, operational or political
situation dictates.

5. Although there may be formal guidelines for the use of force on operations, they will not
cover all situations. When the appropriate action is unclear the use of force by commanders and
soldiers must be guided by their professional ethos and the law of armed conflict.

6. Soldiers may be required to use force in operations other than war for numerous reasons,
e.g. in self-defence, to defend or protect others, or to protect property. Note that everyone
authorized to use force is responsible for any excess force used. In fact, in some cases use of
force without causing injury can be excessive force. Soldiers must apply reasonable force, based
on the following:

a. the threat;

b. the level of resistance compared to the level of control;

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 175
Close Quarter Combat

c. severity of the incident; and

d. attempts to evade or escape.

7. The techniques used during these operations are basic close quarter combat skills. The
sections that follow describe the levels of the continuum of force and how these basic skills are
adjusted to fit each level in order to meet the following requirements:

a. Tactically Effective. The soldier requires skills to deal with common threats,
which work during motor skill deterioration.

b. Legally Accepted. These skills must be applied within the continuum of force.
The soldier must be justified in using force and the force must be reasonable.

c. Minimum Injury Potential. The soldier must control resistant actions with
techniques that have minimal chance of long-term injury.

SECTION 2
LEVEL 1 COMPLIANT
8. At Level 1 the opponent complies with verbal commands. In many cases the soldier will
be dealing with local civilians and military personnel on a daily basis. Most people will
cooperate and obey instructions: Simple verbal commands used with firmness and courtesy will
be sufficient to control most situations. Soldiers who are overly aggressive however may
antagonize a subject, causing verbal non-compliance and unnecessarily escalating the level of
resistance.

9. If this occurs the soldier establishes initial contact with the opponent. In order to respond
appropriately the soldier must assess and evaluate the opponent’s temperament and intent in
order to respond, as follows:

a. Temperament. The opponent’s emotional state can be inferred from physical


behaviour such as yelling, crying, nervousness, uneasiness, calmness,
cheerfulness, aggressiveness, etc.

b. Intent. The opponent’s likely actions can be inferred from physical behaviour
that is more action oriented, e.g. running, striking, carrying or employing a
weapon, or reaching for an object. Intent can also be inferred from the opponent’s
clothing or equipment.

c. Assessing Temperament and Intent. The soldier’s response depends on


evaluation and analysis of relevant information. The opponent’s temperament
and intent is part of this analysis:

(1) The soldier constantly assesses the temperament and intent of every
person he comes in contact with.

176 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

(2) This assessment becomes more focused when something unusual or out of
the ordinary is observed.

(3) Temperament and intent must be assessed very quickly to determine the
threat a subject poses and initiate a motor response.

(4) Throughout any situation there must be constant evaluation and analysis of
the situation. Soldiers must maintain a reactionary gap and adjust motor
responses as necessary.

SECTION 3
LEVEL 2 PASSIVE RESISTANT
10. At Level 2 the opponent demonstrates verbal non-compliance. There will be no
immediate danger of physical harm to either the opponent or soldier, however the soldier must be
prepared to deal with a higher level of resistance.

11. Physical force does not have to be used immediately if the opponent offers verbal non-
compliance. The techniques applied at this level are the bridge between verbal commands and
physical force. To counter resistant behaviour, the soldier applies contact controls as follows:

a. Contact controls are verbal or physical techniques which do not employ the
principles of resistance control, rather they psychologically intimidate the
opponent in order to eliminate resistant behaviour and re-establish cooperation.

b. Contact controls include the following:

(1) repeating verbal commands in a more forceful manner;

(2) warning the opponent of the consequences of failing to cooperate;

(3) assuming a more authoritative posture, position and stance;

(4) requesting assistance if the opponent continues to be uncooperative; and

(5) physical contact controls, i.e. the escort position and head controls, such as
bracing the head prior to a pain compliance technique.

ESCORT POSITION

12. The escort position is the primary method of moving a detained opponent. Proper
positioning is important in order to control the opponent and place the soldier in a position to
deal with the two common types of resistance. If the soldier is carrying a weapon the weapon
side should be kept close to the opponent, as it will be behind him and less vulnerable. If
possible the soldier should not have a personal weapon, with security being provided by another
armed soldier.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 177
Close Quarter Combat

13. To apply the escort position (see Figure 6-1) approach the opponent from tactical position
2½. Maintain an overall view of the opponent and do not focus solely on the arm. The hands are
kept high, and after closing the reactionary gap place both hands on the opponent’s triceps to
prevent him striking with the arm. The left arm maintains contact with the triceps and the right
hand slides down the opponent’s arm, grasping the notch on the wrist in an all round grasp with
the thumb and middle finger. The left shoulder is kept in close to the opponent’s right shoulder
and the arm is pulled down across the front of the body, with the opponent’s right hand against
the soldier’s waist.

Figure 6-1: Escort Position

HEAD CONTROL POSITION

14. The head control position (see Figures 6-2 and 6-3) is used to control a kneeling or seated
opponent. It is also used to move the opponent to a standing position. Approach from tactical
position 2½ or 3. Move in to a deep fighting stance with the feet, the left arm reaching around to
secure the opponent’s jaw. The opponent’s head is pulled tightly in to the soldier’s chest, with
the right hand positioned to apply nerve touch pressure.

178 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-2: Head Control Position

Figure 6-3: Head Control Position

SECTION 4
LEVEL 3 ACTIVE RESISTANT
15. At Level 3 the opponent first demonstrates physical resistance. The opponent does not
attack the soldier, but continues to defy verbal commands. The soldier can also encounter
opponents pulling away, shouting, struggling, barricading themselves in a vehicle or room, or
attempting to flee.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 179
Close Quarter Combat

16. At this level the physical threat to the soldier is still low, and compliance techniques are
used. The principles of controlling resistance (see Chapter 1 paragraph 7) are used, applying
close quarter combat techniques as follows:

a. compliance techniques;

b. soft-hand striking techniques; and

c. non-lethal chemical weapons (on order).

COMPLIANCE TECHNIQUES

17. Compliance techniques are physical force against an opponent to gain compliance using:

a. pressure points;

b. joint manipulation; and

c. restraint techniques.

18. Pressure points achieve pain compliance by applying pressure to a nerve. There are two
methods of applying pressure point control:

a. touch pressure; and

b. striking techniques (used at Level 4).

19. Touch pressure is the application most likely used at Level 3 to control low levels of
resistance, but it can also be used at higher levels if the soldier is close to the opponent. To apply
pressure the soldier follows these five steps (see Chapter 2 Section 3):

a. stabilize the target;

b. apply pressure/counter-pressure;

c. apply pressure with fingertip;

d. loud repetitive verbal commands; and

e. alleviate pressure when pain compliance is achieved.

20. Joint manipulation is used to initiate pain compliance to gain control of the opponent.
This involves applying pressure to joints (elbows, wrist, shoulder, knee, ankle, and fingers) in
two ways:

a. In the opposite direction to which the joint bends. Joints such as knees and
elbows only bend in one direction, and when pressure is applied in the opposite
direction, pain compliance can be achieved.

180 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

b. Beyond the point where the joint stops naturally in its range of motion.

21. Since each joint has a breaking point, pressure must be applied slowly and steadily until
pain compliance is achieved. Continued pressure will break the joint, unnecessarily escalating
the level of force. Joint manipulation also uses the principle of balance displacement.

22. Restraint techniques are designed to temporarily restrict an opponent’s mobility in order
to control and/or transport him. Depending on the operation soldiers may be equipped with
handcuffs or with flexi-cuffs.

WRISTLOCKS

23. Wristlocks are joint manipulation techniques that can be applied a number of ways to
achieve pain compliance or balance displacement. Wristlocks exert pressure beyond the normal
range of motion. They can be applied when an opponent attempts to grab, or to initiate control
over an opponent. Wristlocks can be applied to transport opponents who have demonstrated
resistance from the escort position, or to take an opponent to the ground and in to the rear control
position (see paragraph 47).

BASIC WRISTLOCK

24. The basic wristlock (see Figures 6-4 and 6-5) is applied when the opponent attempts to
grab or reaches for the soldier. If the opponent grabs with the right hand apply the technique
with the left hand. Grasp the opponent’s hand to the thumb side, the fingers grabbing the meaty
portion under the opponent’s thumb. Place the thumb against the back of the opponent’s hand so
it is between the middle knuckles.

25. The fingers are used to anchor the hand so leverage can be applied to twist and bend the
joint to the outside. Pressure is exerted downward with the thumb across the knuckle line to
bend the opponent’s wrist. The hand is rotated to the outside twisting the joint. Shift in to the
opponent to keep the hand close to the body to gain leverage and control.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 181
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-4: Basic Wristlock

Figure 6-5: Basic Wristlock

REVERSE WRISTLOCK

26. A reverse wristlock (see Figures 6-6 and 6-7) is executed by grabbing the opponent’s
right hand with your right hand. Place the palm on the back of the opponent’s hand, wrapping

182 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

the fingers across the fleshy part of the palm below the little finger. Twist the opponent’s hand
to the inside, pivoting the body inward and rotating the elbow up on to the forearm while holding
the hand tight to the chest.

Figure 6-6: Reverse Wristlock

Figure 6-7: Reverse Wristlock

ESCORT POSITION RESISTANCE

27. There are two common forms of resistance encountered when escorting an opponent:

a. arm curl resistance, where the opponent curls the arm toward the chest in an
attempt to escape; and

b. straight-arm lockout, where the opponent locks the elbow and attempts to pull
away.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 183
Close Quarter Combat

COME-ALONG WRISTLOCK

28. To counter arm curl resistance in the escort position apply the come-along wristlock (see
Figures 6-8 to 6-13). On meeting resistance immediately turn in to the opponent and with the
outside leg apply a knee strike to the peroneal nerve as a distraction. Then shoot the left hand
between the opponent’s upper arm and body, grasping the top of the hand and forcing
downward, tucking the opponent’s arm under the armpit and locking the elbow in to the side of
the body. The outside hand assists in forcing the opponent’s arm in to the side of the body. To
apply pressure the soldier’s index knuckle must be directly over the opponent’s index knuckle.

Figure 6-8: Come-along Wristlock

Figure 6-9: Come-along Wristlock

184 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-10: Come-along Wristlock

Figure 6-11: Come-along Wristlock

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 185
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-12: Come-along Wristlock

Figure 6-13: Come-along Wristlock

29. The come-along wristlock can also be applied to a resistant opponent already in the basic
or reverse wristlock. To apply this from the basic wristlock (see Figures 6-14 and 6-15) augment
your grip using the right hand to provide greater control. Maintain pressure with the right hand
and pivot the body to tactical position 2. Release the left hand and quickly reach under the
opponent’s arm from behind, gripping the hand so that the index knuckles cover each other. To
gain control, apply downward pressure on the opponent’s wrist.

186 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-14: Basic to Come-along Wristlock

Figure 6-15: Basic to Come-along Wristlock

30. To apply the come-along wristlock from the reverse wristlock (see Figures 6-16 to 6-18)
the left hand maintains pressure on the opponent’s hand. The right hand strikes in a thumb up
manner to the inside of the opponent’s elbow, causing it to bend and rotate inward. Force the

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 187
Close Quarter Combat

opponent’s elbow in to the side of the body, simultaneously rotating the hand up in to the come-
along.

Figure 6-16: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock

Figure 6-17: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock

188 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-18: Reverse to Come-along Wristlock

STRAIGHT-ARM BAR TAKEDOWN

31. To counter the straight-arm lockout in the escort position apply the straight-arm bar
takedown (see Figures 6-19 to 6-22). Immediately turn in and deliver a knee strike with the
outside leg to distract the opponent. Pull the opponent’s arm down across the front of the body,
with the hand brought to the soldier’s waist. The bony portion of the wrist applies pressure down
and across the triceps. Simultaneously step back with the leg that executed the knee strike, pivot
180 degrees and drop to the inside knee, taking the opponent to the ground.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 189
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-19: Straight-arm Bar Takedown

Figure 6-20: Straight-arm Bar Takedown

190 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-21: Straight-arm Bar Takedown

Figure 6-22: Straight-arm Bar Takedown

NON-LETHAL RESTRAINT TECHNIQUES

32. In some operations it may be necessary to temporarily restrict an opponent’s mobility


with mechanical devices. Non-lethal restraints may be used to control an opponent during
transport or prevent further resistant behaviour. Restraints may also be used to control a large
number of opponents. There are two means to restrain an opponent, handcuffs and flexi-cuffs.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 191
Close Quarter Combat

33. When applying restraints the soldier will encounter three types of opponent:

a. Totally cooperative, the most common type of opponent, where the soldier meets
no resistance. An opponent could however turn uncooperative and resist at any
moment.

b. Potentially uncooperative, the most dangerous type of opponent to restrain, since


the soldier has to close the reactionary gap and will not normally meet resistance
until first contact with the opponent. A potentially uncooperative opponent will
normally be either intoxicated or experienced in dealing with authorities.

c. Totally uncooperative, for which there is no effective method of restraint. With


this type of opponent the soldier must first gain control, then apply restraints.

34. When applying handcuffs a high level of control can be achieved by applying the
following restraint techniques:

a. Approach to Contact. Always assume that the opponent will be uncooperative.


Therefore the reactionary gap must be maintained until both cuffs are secure. The
first cuff is applied from the edge of the reactionary gap.

b. Control on Contact. In many cases the opponent will react as the soldier applies
the first cuff so it is important to gain control immediately on contact. This is
achieved using the double push method with handcuffs, or applying a thumb lock
and finger lock with flexi cuffs.

c. Speed in Application. To prevent resistance move quickly to apply both cuffs,


securing them in less than 3 seconds.

35. Handcuff Maintenance. Handcuffs should be maintained at least weekly. Common


failures and remedies with handcuffs are:

a. cuffs fail to unlock—use another key since yours may be damaged;

b. single bar will not rotate smoothly through double bar—use the single bar on the
other cuff to pry apart the damaged double bar; and

c. single bar will not rotate smoothly through ratchet—clean and oil (note that some
brands of handcuffs do not rotate smoothly).

HANDCUFF GRIP

36. The most fundamental and critical aspect of handcuffing is the grip. Prior to closing with
the opponent position the handcuffs in a pistol grip, with an all round grip on the chain so that
the right hand forms a pistol grip supporting the top cuff (see Figure 6-23). The bottom cuff is
turned in at a 45 degree angle to ensure easy application of the cuff. The double bar of the top

192 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

cuff is loaded toward the palm and the lower cuff double bar is loaded in either direction
depending on soldier preference. This is known as the chambered position.

37. Soldiers with large hands can use a modified grip, keeping the index finger pointed
forward (see Figure 6-24).

Figure 6-23: Handcuff Grip

Figure 6-24: Handcuff Grip (modified)

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 193
Close Quarter Combat

STANDING HANDCUFFING

38. To handcuff an opponent in the standing position (see Figures 6-25 to 6-29) first direct
the opponent to the standing handcuffing position. Have the opponent put his hands above his
head, so that any clothing on the upper body is raised in order to check for weapons on the
opponent’s waist. Then have the opponent turn 360 degrees, stopping him at tactical position
2½.

39. Then direct the opponent to spread his feet apart and point the toes outward, placing his
hands out to the side with the palms back, bending forward at the waist, and looking away from
the soldier. Then have the opponent bring his hands back to a position where they are directly in
line with the approach to contact.

40. Now chamber the cuffs and approach from tactical position 2½, maintaining an overall
view of the opponent.

41. To apply the first cuff position it so that the single bar is in line with the notch on the
outside of the opponent’s wrist. The opposite hand grasps the opponent’s thumb, pushing toward
the single bar of the upper cuff while simultaneously pushing the cuff toward the other hand.
The cuff must go on oval to oval. At this point it is not important if the cuff closes and locks.

42. Once the first cuff is applied rotate the opponent’s thumb upward and the cuff down.
This action will force the opposite arm up. Move the hand to the small of the back. Release the
thumb lock and grasp the opponent’s left hand with either the fingers or the thumb. Rotate the
hand inward so the thumb is up and position it to apply the second cuff. The second hand can be
cuffed either upward or downward depending on how the lower cuff was chambered.

43. Once both cuffs are applied secure and check for tightness. To do this, place the little
finger between the cuff and the opponent’s wrist. When the tactical situation permits, the
handcuffs should be double locked to prevent injury to the opponent or the possibility of escape.

194 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-25: Standing Handcuffing

Figure 6-26: Standing Handcuffing

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 195
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-27: Standing Handcuffing

Figure 6-28: Standing Handcuffing

196 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-29: Standing Handcuffing

KNEELING HANDCUFFING

44. To handcuff an opponent in the kneeling position have him move to his knees, one leg at
a time, crossing the ankles and sitting on them (see Figure 6-30). If the opponent is unable to do
this have him place his toes pointing directly to the rear (see Figure 6-31). The handcuffing
procedure is the same as for standing except the second cuff should be top loaded, since this
assists maintaining balance while applying the second cuff.

Figure 6-30: Kneeling Handcuffing Position 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 197
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-31: Kneeling Handcuffing Position 2

PRONE HANDCUFFING

45. To handcuff an opponent in the prone position (see Figures 6-32 to 6-35) have him adopt
the prone position with the feet apart and flat, and the head turned away. The arms should be
straight out and palms up.

46. Approach from tactical position 2½ and apply the first cuff. Then move to tactical
position 1, by shifting forward to drop the opponent’s arm to the ground and then bringing it
back up once in position. This will put the opponent in a position where he cannot roll toward
the soldier. The cuff does not have to lock.

47. Now move to the rear control position and direct the opponent to bring his free hand to
the small of his back. Then place this hand in the second cuff using a finger lock.

198 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-32: Prone Handcuffing

Figure 6-33: Prone Handcuffing

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 199
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-34: Prone Handcuffing

Figure 6-35: Prone Handcuffing

200 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

REAR CONTROL POSITION

48. The rear control position is used to gain control of non-compliant opponents when
encountering resistance during transport or handcuffing.

49. When the opponent is on the ground face down the soldier steps in from tactical position
1. The right foot is placed by the head and the knee is positioned between the shoulder blades
(see Figure 6-36). The left foot is then placed against the side of the body and the knee is placed
across the back. The knees are kept close together and the hands control the arm with a reverse
wristlock.

50. This position can be modified so that the left knee is positioned by the side of the
opponent’s body (see Figure 6-37). This technique is used if the soldier has difficulty with the
first application. This position is also used if the opponent was rendered unconscious or non-
lethal chemical weapons have been employed.

Figure 6-36: Rear Control Position

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 201
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-37: Rear Control Position (modified)

FLEXI-CUFFS

51. There may be times when handcuffs are not issued or suitable for operations but the
soldier must still restrain opponents. Flexi-cuffs are an alternate means for securing opponents.
To apply the cuff the soldier prepares them and loops one cuff over the arm, the second cuff to
the inside with the draw tabs up (see Figure 6-38). The flexi-cuff is applied right arm to right
arm.

202 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-38: Flexi-cuff Position

52. Direct the opponent to the position to apply the cuff. Ideally, flexi-cuffs are applied in
the kneeling or prone position to maintain control (see Figures 6-39 to 6-41). Approach from
tactical position 2½, and step on the foot for added control. Grab three of the opponent’s fingers
(middle to little finger), then slide the cuff on to the opponent’s arm, ensuring his index finger
and thumb are tucked in.

53. Once the first cuff is applied tighten the cuff (depending on the make of cuff) and then
reach across the opponent if in the kneeling position to grab the second hand in a thumb lock and
take it to the small of the opponent’s back. In the prone position use verbal commands to have
the opponent bring the second hand back. The second cuff is then applied and secured.

Figure 6-39: Applying Flexi-cuffs

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 203
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-40: Applying Flexi-cuffs

Figure 6-41: Applying Flexi-cuffs

STANDING AND ESCORTING A RESTRAINED OPPONENT

54. To bring a restrained opponent from the prone to a standing position, place the hand
closest to his head in to the crook of the elbow and the other hand behind the neck. Assist the
opponent in to the sitting position, rotating him away from you. Have the opponent then bend
the leg closest to you and, maintaining the grip on the arm and neck, assist the opponent to the
standing position.

204 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

55. Escorting a restrained opponent is done from tactical position 2½. Grasp the opponent’s
elbow with the outside hand, the back of opponent’s hand with the inside hand, and apply a
come-along wristlock (see Figure 6-42).

Figure 6-42: Handcuff Escort Position

RESTRAINT REMOVAL

56. When removing restraints from an opponent control must be maintained as once free the
opponent may attack the soldier. On removal of the first cuff instruct the opponent to place his
hand on his head. Then move to tactical position 2 with the opponent’s arm full extended.
Maintain the grip on the handcuffs and ensure that the first cuff is locked, as it can serve as an
edged weapon. When removing the second cuff the soldier’s hand must be in position to
immediately put pressure on the opponent’s wrist, the position being determined by whether the
key hole is up or down (see Figures 6-43 and 6-44). When removing Flexi Cuffs the same
techniques are followed however cuffs are cut.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 205
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-43: Keyhole Up

Figure 6-44: Keyhole Down

SOFT HAND STRIKING TECHNIQUES

57. Soft hand striking techniques are used to control resistant behaviour by creating a
distraction, e.g. a knee strike to the peroneal nerve. They may also include balance displacement
techniques like the compression takedown or head tear down.

NON-LETHAL CHEMICAL WEAPONS

58. Non-lethal chemical weapons can be an effective compliance tool when used properly.
At Level 3 these weapons will be deployed on order, e.g. during crowd control or against
barricaded opponents. This weapon will be covered in detail in Level 4.

206 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

SECTION 5
LEVEL 4 ASSAULT
59. At Level 4 the opponent may physically attack the soldier, but does not use a weapon.
The opponent may strike, kick, wrestle or bite. The soldier uses defensive tactics to defeat the
attack, re-establish control, and maintain it once compliance is achieved. Soldiers must work
quickly to stop the assault to restore control, protect participants from injury, and prevent the
situation escalating to one which requires deadly force. Defensive tactics include the following:

a. defensive techniques;

b. striking techniques;

c. enhanced pain compliance techniques;

d. non-lethal chemical weapons; and

e. impact weapon techniques.

DEFENSIVE TECHNIQUES

60. An assaulting opponent may quickly attack the soldier to try to gain advantage. Soldiers
must be prepared to defend themselves as they will be reacting rather than acting. Defensive
techniques include parrying and blocking techniques, and also counters to chokes and common
attacks. If an opponent is able to apply any hold on the soldier apply a counter to control the
opponent, taking him to the ground and to a rear control position.

STRIKING TECHNIQUES

61. In order to gain control of an assaulting opponent it may be necessary to employ striking
techniques. The soldier applies strikes that are aimed at nerve pressure points to stun the
opponent or cause temporary motor dysfunction. Strikes must be delivered with 100% speed and
power.

62. The following striking techniques focus on an assaulting opponent:

a. Heel palm/ridge hand brachial strike to stun the opponent. This effectively stops
his forward momentum, and also controls standing grappling situations. Strike
from the outside of the opponent, aiming for the side of the neck directly below
the ear.

b. Knife-edge brachial strike to stun the opponent. This technique is normally


applied after blocking an attack or in a standing grappling situation. It is
delivered to the inside, striking for the brachial plexus.

c. Hammer fist suprascapular stun to stun the opponent and also cause motor
dysfunction to the arm on the side struck. This technique is applied from tactical

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 207
Close Quarter Combat

position 3 when an opponent is grabbing someone else. Approach from behind


and strike the opponent in the suprascapular in a hammer style strike.

d. Heel palm/straight and reverse punch to stun, distract and cause balance
displacement to the opponent. These effectively stop an assaulting opponent’s
forward momentum and set up further control techniques. The primary target for
these techniques is the upper body, but the head is a secondary target. The heel
palm strike is particularly effective for striking the head, as it has lower injury
potential for both the soldier and opponent.

e. Roundhouse kick to cause motor dysfunction to the leg and also stun the
opponent. The primary target is the peroneal nerve, the secondary target being
the femoral nerve. This technique allows the soldier to strike at long range.

f. Front snap kick to cause motor dysfunction to the leg and also stun the opponent.
The primary target is the lower shin. This technique can be used at long or mid-
range to stop an opponent’s forward momentum.

g. Knee strike to cause motor dysfunction of the affected leg and to stun the
opponent it can also be used as a distraction technique. The primary target is the
peroneal nerve, the secondary target being the femoral nerve. This technique
effectively stops an opponent’s forward momentum and any resistance in the
escort position.

ENHANCED PAIN COMPLIANCE TECHNIQUES

63. An opponent may initiate an assault after the soldier has applied a technique at a lower
level of the continuum of force, e.g. when placed in a reverse wristlock. If the opponent
demonstrates a higher level of resistance apply a technique to counter that resistance and
continue to escalate as required to gain control.

64. Enhanced pain compliance techniques take the affected joint to the point where the
opponent submits or the joint is broken. The side choke is also classed as an enhanced pain
compliance technique.

BASIC WRISTLOCK TAKEDOWN

65. The basic wristlock takedown (see Figures 6-45 to 6-50) is used to take an assaulting
opponent to the ground once a basic wristlock is applied. Pressure is applied to the wrist by
pulling the opponent’s wrist in with your left hand and applying pressure to the back of the hand
with your right. Then step back pulling the opponent toward you and to the ground. Maintain
pressure on the wrist when the opponent is on the ground.

66. With this technique the opponent will either land on his stomach or on his back, as some
opponents will attempt to roll out of the wristlock. If the opponent lands on his stomach rotate
the hand to a reverse wristlock and move to the rear control position.

208 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

67. If the opponent lands on his back roll him on to his stomach by rotating the fingers
toward the head, simultaneously shifting in the same direction. Once the opponent is on his
stomach rotate the fingers in the opposite direction, in to a reverse wristlock, and place him in
the rear control position.

Figure 6-45: Basic Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-46: Basic Wristlock Takedown

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 209
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-47: Basic Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-48: Basic Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-49: Basic Wristlock Takedown

210 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-50: Basic Wristlock Takedown

REVERSE WRISTLOCK TAKEDOWN

68. The reverse wristlock takedown (see Figures 6-51 to 6-54) is used to take an opponent to
the ground once a reverse wristlock is applied. The soldier’s weight is applied against the back
of the opponent’s arm to cause balance displacement, then dropping the soldier’s weight to cause
the takedown.

69. From the reverse wristlock pivot in against the opponent, placing the left arm over the
opponent’s extended arm, ensuring the armpit is above the opponent’s elbow. Then kick out the
left leg and drop straight down to a seated position, applying pressure to the arm and keeping
your weight across the opponent’s back.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 211
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-51: Reverse Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-52: Reverse Wristlock Takedown

212 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-53: Reverse Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-54: Reverse Wristlock Takedown

SIDE CHOKE

70. The side choke is an effective enhanced pain compliance technique. It is flexible, as it
can be applied from all tactical position and from ground fighting positions. It also allows
varying levels of control to be applied as follows:

a. Level 1—side control but no compression;

b. Level 2—mechanical compression until pain forces opponent compliance; and

c. Level 3—compression which causes unconsciousness.

71. Note that the side choke is the only choke that can be applied at Level 4. For further
detail on applying this choke see Chapter 5 paragraphs 21 to 25.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 213
Close Quarter Combat

IRON WRISTLOCK TAKEDOWN

72. Resistance during handcuffing usually occurs upon first contact, i.e. when the first cuff is
applied. If the opponent resists while being cuffed from either the standing or kneeling positions
apply the iron wristlock takedown (see Figures 6-55 and 6-56).

73. On immediately feeling resistance step back in the direction of approach. Maintaining
the wristlock with the first cuff, sharply pull the opponent’s arm downward, forcing the opponent
in to the prone position. From here move to the rear control position.

Figure 6-55: Iron Wristlock Takedown

Figure 6-56: Iron Wristlock Takedown

FINGER LOCK TAKEDOWN

74. If the soldier is using flexi-cuffs and meets resistance, apply a finger lock takedown to
control the opponent (see Figures 6-57 and 6-58). Place the left hand on the back of the

214 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

opponent’s triceps, applying pressure to straighten the arm, while the right hand applies pressure
to the finger lock, forcing the fingers down and toward the opponent’s head.

Figure 6-57: Finger Lock Takedown

Figure 6-58: Finger Lock Takedown

NON-LETHAL CHEMICAL WEAPONS

75. Non-lethal chemical weapons are designed to control resistant behaviour. They are
deployed as an intermediate weapon at Level 4 of the continuum of force. This weapon is
usually not a response to an immediate deadly force assault, but is used to resolve situations with

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 215
Close Quarter Combat

non-lethal means. Non-lethal chemical weapons may also be deployed on order to control
resistive behaviour at lower levels of the continuum of force.

AGENT CHARACTERISTICS

76. There are several effective agents for controlling resistant behaviour. Depending on the
type of operation being conducted the soldier may use various non-lethal chemical weapons.
Currently the main agent used is Oleoresin Capsicum (OC), commonly known as pepper spray,
but CS and CN may also be available.

77. The characteristics of CS agent are:

a. classified as an irritant;

b. white crystalline solid which activates in the presence of moisture;

c. irritates the eyes and damp areas of the body, including the respiratory tract;

d. used worldwide as a tactical option for crowd management, but is not used as an
incapacitant; and

e. reaction time 20 to 30 seconds.

78. The characteristics of CN agent are:

a. classified as an irritant;

b. trade name Mace;

c. tearing agent which produces burning, itching and nausea;

d. used primarily for crowd management; and

e. reaction time 2 to5 seconds.

79. The characteristics of OC agent are described in paragraphs 81 and 82.

OLEORESIN CAPSICUM (OC) SPRAY

80. OC spray provides the soldier an intermediate weapon to control resistant behaviour
without having to resort to impact weapons or deadly force. During certain CF operations OC
spray may be issued as defensive equipment for self-protection. ROE for the mission or specific
situation governs its use, which is strictly controlled. Note the following:

a. The courts have upheld use of force models that include OC spray use,
recognizing it as a humane force option compared to other use of force options.

216 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

b. Courts have also ruled against those that use OC spray maliciously, negligently,
or to punish an opponent. Soldiers using OC spray contradictory to ROE or
SOPs could face disciplinary action/charges.

c. OC spray is a prohibited weapon and must be controlled and stored appropriately.


Anyone found in possession of OC spray in Canada or abroad other than when on
duty and authorized to use it could face disciplinary action/charges.

81. Once trained in OC spray use the soldier must re-qualify annually.

82. OC spray has the following physiological effects:

a. burning all exposed skin;

b. burning and uncomfortable inflammation of mucus membranes, eyes and nose;

c. burning, inflammation and constriction of the throat and esophagus;

d. involuntary closing of the eyes;

e. reaction time 1 to 2 seconds; and

f. normal lasting effect on an opponent 30 to 45 minutes.

83. OC has the following psychological effects:

a. intense panic (short shallow breaths); and

b. loss of will to fight.

84. OC is effective controlling persons under the influence of drugs and alcohol, the mentally
ill, and animals.

85. OC Aerosol Projectors. OC aerosol projectors consist of the following components:

a. pressure tight canister;

b. liquid formulation (½ to ¾ of the internal volume);

c. nitrogen propellant gas (the remaining volume);

d. self-enclosing valve and actuator (control button);

e. dip tube; and

f. nozzle.

86. Only issued projectors and canisters will be used. Prior to use the projector must be
shaken to ensure effective delivery. Each projector has a serial number and is effective for four

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 217
Close Quarter Combat

years. Currently there is no method to determine the exact amount of OC remaining in the
projector (canisters can be weighed to measure content). Each canister consists of 90% inactive
ingredient and 10% active ingredient:

a. active ingredient:

(1) 3 to 3.5% OC; and

(2) 96.5 to 97% distilled water; and

b. inactive ingredient

(1) 60% distilled water;

(2) 35% denatured (non isopolical) alcohol; and

(3) 5% nitrogen propellant compressed gas, which is safe for humans and the
environment.

87. The effective range will depend on the type of projector being used, as follows:

a. Marks 3, 4 and 5. Minimum range .91 metre, maximum range 3.65 to 4.57
metres.

b. Mark 6. Minimum .91 metre, maximum 3 to 3.65 metres.

c. Mark 9. Minimum 1.82 metres, maximum 3 to 4.57 metres.

d. Marks 21 and 46. Minimum 4.57 metres, maximum 7.62 to 9.14 metres.

88. Tactical Employment. OC spray is employed tactically as follows:

a. Use the element of surprise.

b. Advise opponent(s) that continued resistive behaviour will be countered.

c. Access OC projector. The projector can be carried in either hand, but it is


recommended that the soldier not employ it using his dominant hand, as this will
keep that hand free for quick personal weapon access. The control button is
actuated with either the thumb or index finger.

d. Aim for the forehead (OC must hit the eyes to be 100% effective) using two ½ to
1 second bursts. Use one of the following spray patterns:

(1) criss cross;

(2) serpentine;

(3) circle;

218 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

(4) low to high; and

(5) side to side.

e. Beware of cross contamination.

f. Factor in the minimum and maximum ranges described at paragraph 85.

g. The projector should never be deployed upside down, Ensure that the nozzle is
toward the opponent.

89. Special Considerations. Soldiers must be aware of the following when employing OC
spray:

a. Avoid the hypodermic needle effect, i.e. spray is too concentrated when released
within the minimum safety distance and there is the potential for eye injuries.

b. Avoid over-contamination, i.e. more than two bursts, or bursts longer than ½ to 1
second, which is excessive force. If the OC spray fails to have an effect the
soldier can escalate to a higher level of control.

c. Do not use on infants or elderly persons.

d. Do not use on opponents with known respiratory problems.

90. First Aid and Decontamination. As soon as an opponent is sprayed communicate to


him using firm clear commands not to move and to comply. Inform him that failure to do so will
be considered further resistant behaviour and that further action may be taken. If the opponent is
cooperative apply restraints. If the opponent is not cooperative take him to the ground and then
apply restraints.

91. Decontamination starts only after the opponent has been controlled.

92. Once an opponent has been contaminated it is the soldier’s responsibility to ensure his
safety and well being. Opponents must be controlled immediately to prevent further injury to
themselves or other persons. Note that contaminated opponents must not be left face down in a
prone position.

93. To decontaminate an opponent:

a. Expose opponent to fresh air.

b. Flush opponent’s eyes with uncontaminated cool water until vision is restored, or
transport to the nearest medical facility if the opponent requires medical attention
or has a serious reaction to OC spray. Ensure medical personnel are informed of
the decontamination procedures undertaken and provide OC spray data sheet.

c. Have medical personnel remove contact lenses if worn.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 219
Close Quarter Combat

d. If possible have the opponent shower and issue clean clothing.

e. Observe opponent at 15 minute intervals for 1 hour to ensure there is no


permanent damage.

f. Do not apply creams, salve, or oil.

g. Record all decontamination efforts and time intervals on a formal report.

94. Counter-OC Tactics. If a soldier is contaminated or cross-contaminated the primary


concern is weapons retention. The soldier must remain calm, maintain an offensive mindset, and
remember that anything that can be done with sight can be done without it. If an opponent is
attacking and attempting to disarm the soldier this is a deadly force situation.

95. After weapon retention, determine a plan. All defensive tactics can be executed while
visually impaired, however the soldier may have to escalate the level of control to deal with the
threat.

96. As soon as possible start decontamination procedures. Immediately after being sprayed
blink rapidly the eyes until vision is restored. Use a palm up shielding method and evasion to
avoid being sprayed.

NON-LETHAL IMPACT WEAPONS

97. Non-lethal impact weapons are used to control assaults intended to seriously injure the
soldier. Impact weapons can be used defensively, offensively, or as a restraining device.

98. The impact weapon is an intermediate weapon that can be employed at Level 4 or 5 on
the continuum of force. Soldiers employ non-lethal impact weapons in the following situations:

a. when empty hand control techniques fail;

b. when the soldier believes empty hand techniques would be ineffective;

c. as a means to cause temporary motor dysfunction, not permanent injury; and

d. when deadly force is not justified.

99. Non-lethal baton techniques employ the 10 angles of attack (see Chapter 7 paragraph 2),
however the main angles used are 1, 2, 3 and 4. In non-lethal situations the target areas vary,
since striking the head or bony portions of the body is considered deadly force.

100. Offensively the primary striking area for non-lethal baton strikes is the peroneal nerve
pressure point (see Figure 6-59). The secondary target is the femoral nerve pressure point (see
Figure 6-60). Defensively the soldier uses the weapon to block hand strikes and grabs, targeting
the radial or ulna nerve pressure points (see Figures 6-61 and 6-62).

220 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

Figure 6-59: Peroneal Strike

Figure 6-60: Femoral Strike

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 221
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-61: Radial Strike

Figure 6-62: Ulna Strike

222 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

AUGMENTED REAR ARM BAR

101. The augmented rear arm bar is used to restrain an opponent (see Figures 6-63 to 6-66).
Use the right hand to run the baton up under the opponent’s left armpit, parallel to the ground.
With the right foot step 45 degrees to the left of the opponent’s tactical position 2, dropping the
handle of the baton down so that you are forearm to forearm with the opponent. Drive the right
hand forward and up to bend the opponent’s arm up behind the back. Continue to move around
to tactical position 2½, continuing to apply pressure to the forearm. With the left hand grasp the
top of the baton; to apply pressure pull up on the handle of the baton, at the same time pushing
down on the top. With the left hand grab the opponent’s triceps or shoulder. Continue exerting
downward pressure with the right forearm while pulling back on the shoulder or arm with the left
hand. This places the opponent in a position of control for transport. To take the opponent to the
ground step on the back of the left calf to take him to his knees and then drop him forward to the
rear control position.

Figure 6-63: Augmented Rear Arm Bar

Figure 6-64: Augmented Rear Arm Bar

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 223
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 6-65: Augmented Rear Arm Bar

Figure 6-66: Augmented Rear Arm Bar

224 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Non-Lethal Techniques

SECTION 6
LEVEL 5 DEADLY FORCE ASSAULT
102. At the fifth and final level of the continuum of force the opponent usually has a weapon
and will either kill or seriously injure the soldier or other personnel if he is not brought under
control. Note the following:

a. While guns and knives are the most obvious weapons, improvised weapons such
as pipes, chains, hazardous materials, or any tool that can be used as a bludgeon
or cutting instrument may pose a lethal threat.

b. Any physical confrontation in which no weapon is involved, but the soldier is in


fear of imminent death or grievous bodily harm, constitutes authorization to apply
deadly force.

103. Deadly Force. Deadly force is force used to cause death or grievous bodily harm, or
force which a reasonable and prudent person would consider likely to create a substantial risk of
causing death or grievous bodily harm. Note the following:

a. Deadly force is only employed as a last resort and only after all lesser means of
force have failed to produce the intended result, or if circumstances prevent the
use of lesser means.

b. Soldiers authorized to carry weapons in the performance of their duties will use
only the minimum amount of force necessary to reach their objective.

104. Deadly force is most often applied by the soldier using small arms. Deadly force may
also include close quarter combat, e.g. use of impact or edged weapons, or strikes to vulnerable
points of the body.

105. Circumstances for using Deadly Force. Deadly force is justified only under conditions
of extreme necessity, as a last resort, when lesser means have failed or can not reasonably be
employed, and only under one or more of the following circumstances:

a. in self defence;

b. in defence of other CF personnel and CF units;

c. in some circumstances, for the protection of others;

d. in some circumstances, to protect property; and

e. in accordance with a lawful order.

106. Criteria for using Deadly Force. To use deadly force the following criteria should be
present:

a. Weapon. The opponent must possess a weapon that if employed would result in
death or grievous bodily harm to the soldier or others. Alternatively, the

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 225
Close Quarter Combat

opponent has the physical means to commit an assault that would result in death
or grievous bodily injury to the soldier or others.

b. Intent. The opponent must demonstrate the intent to commit the assault. This
can be indicated by a statement of intent to inflict injury, damage or other hostile
act, but can also be indicated by the brandishing of a weapon in deadly manner.

c. Delivery System. The opponent must have an unobstructed way to bring the
weapon to bear on the soldier or other personnel.

226 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 7
EDGED AND IMPACT WEAPON TECHNIQUES

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Soldiers must be able to attack and defend against a variety of weapons. As well as
fighting with a rifle and bayonet the soldier must make effective use of edged and impact
weapons, and understand that any object can be employed as a weapon or as a means of defence.

ANGLES OF ATTACK

Figure 7-1a: Right-handed Soldier—Angles of Attack

Figure 7-1b: Left handed Soldier—Angles of Attack

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 227
Close Quarter Combat

2. Angles of attack apply with all weapons. Edged weapons include knives and machetes,
and impact weapons include sticks, clubs, batons, and weapons of opportunity. Angles of attack
(see Figure 7-1) are as follows:

a. angle 1 cuts down at 45 degrees across the opponent from the outside;

b. angle 2 cuts down at 45 degrees across the opponent from the inside;

c. angle 3 cuts across the opponent horizontally from the outside;

d. angle 4 cuts across the opponent horizontally from the inside;

e. angle 5 is a forward thrust to the opponent’s body from eye to groin level, with
the fingers downward;

f. angle 6 is a reverse thrust to the opponent’s body from eye to groin level, with the
fingers upward;

g. angle 7 cuts up at 45 degrees across the opponent from the outside;

h. angle 8 cuts up at 45 degrees across the opponent from the inside;

i. angle 9 cuts vertically straight up the opponent; and

j. angle 10 cuts vertically straight down the opponent

SECTION 2
FUNDAMENTALS OF KNIFE FIGHTING
3. Edged weapons can cause serious damage and massive trauma, which will stop an
opponent. A knife or bayonet, properly employed, is a deadly weapon. It can be used for
offensive tasks to silence sentries, or in defensive situations where the soldier is unable to
employ his weapon. The soldier must have the mindset that these are effective tools, and he
must be aggressive and attack straight to the opponent’s vulnerable areas. Very rarely will a
soldier face a similarly armed opponent.

4. Grips. There are two types of grips used in knife fighting. Both grips are an all round
grasp of the handle, maintained with a firm grip to prevent the shock of hitting the target
knocking the knife from the soldier’s hand. When using a knife with no guard, or an improvised
edged weapon, the soldier must place the thumb on the top of the weapon to prevent the hand
sliding on to the blade. The two grips used in knife fighting are:

a. Hammer Grip (see Figure 7-2). The blade of the weapon is up, and the grip is an
all round grasp of the handle with the thumb and forefinger against the guard.

b. Ice Pick Grip (see Figure 7-3). The blade of the weapon is down, and the grip is
an all round grasp of the handle with the little finger against the guard.

228 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-2: Hammer Grip

Figure 7-3: Ice Pick Grip

5. Stance. The soldier uses the fighting stance as the foundation from which all knife
attacks and techniques are initiated. The lead hand forms a vertical shield to parry the opponent’s
strikes and protect the ribs, throat and head. The right hand is lowered so the point of the blade is
pointing directly at the opponent. When fighting an opponent armed with a knife the stance
should be altered so the knife is in the lead hand in a position to parry the opponents knife
strikes.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
229
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-4: Knife Fighting Stance

6. Principles. The basic principles of knife fighting are:

a. Execute movements with the knife blade within a box covering the central torso,
i.e. shoulder- width across from the neck down to the waistline. This is
fundamental, because the opponent has a greater chance of blocking an attack if
the blade is brought wide in a sweeping movement.

b. Close with the opponent, coming straight to the target.

c. Move the knife in straight lines.

d. Point the knife forward and toward the opponent.

7. Target Areas. During any confrontation the parts of the opponent’s body that are
exposed or readily accessible will vary. The aim in knife fighting is to attack the body’s soft,

230 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

vital target areas that are readily accessible, i.e. the face, sides and front of the neck, lower
abdomen, and groin. Target areas should be engaged as follows:

a. Throat. Attack the throat with thrusts and slashes. The thrust is the most
effective attack. If the knife is driven in to the base of the throat just below the
Adam’s apple the jugular vein will be cut, or, if driven in to the side of the neck,
the carotid artery will be cut. In either case the opponent will die within a few
seconds from loss of blood. When slashing to the throat target the same areas, the
side of the neck being the most accessible.

b. Stomach. A thrust combined with a slash to the stomach produces shock. The
opponent will be stunned and unable to defend. This produces an opening to
deliver a killing blow. A deep wound to the stomach causes death if the wound is
unattended.

c. Heart. A thrust to the heart causes almost instant death. This spot is difficult to
hit however because of the protecting ribs, but a hard thrust will usually slip off a
rib and penetrate the heart.

d. Wrist. A slash to the wrist will sever the radial artery, which is slightly less than
1 centimetre below the skin. Unconsciousness results in about 30 seconds, and
death within 2 minutes. This is an excellent attack if the opponent attempts to
grab.

e. Upper Arm. A slash to the upper arm just above the inside of the elbow cuts the
brachial artery, which is just over 1 centimetre below the skin. Unconsciousness
occurs in about 15 seconds, and death within 2 minutes.

f. Leg. A slash or stab to the inside of the leg near the groin severs the femoral
artery causing severe bleeding. Damage to the large muscle groups will reduce
the opponent’s base and mobility, creating openings for follow-up attacks.

g. Kidney. Attacking the kidneys is effective for removing a sentry. Thrust the
knife in to the opponent’s kidney, simultaneously grabbing the mouth and nose.
Force the blade back and forth to create further injury. Attacking the kidneys
produces immediate shock and internal hemorrhaging, quickly followed by death.

8. Movement. Ideally the soldier should move in a 360 degree circle around the opponent.
This allows access to different target areas. Avoid being directly in front of the opponent, who
can then rely on his forward momentum to seize the tactical advantage. If facing an opponent,
move in 45 degree increments to either side. This helps avoid an opponent’s strikes and places
the soldier in a good position to attack.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
231
Close Quarter Combat

SECTION 3
KNIFE FIGHTING TECHNIQUES

SLASHING TECHNIQUES

9. Slashing techniques are used to close with an opponent. They distract the opponent and
cause damage. Target the opponent’s limbs to reduce his ability to strike and to create openings.

VERTICAL SLASHING TECHNIQUE

10. The vertical slash follows a line straight down through the target with either an ice pick
or hammer grip (see Figure 7-5). Thrust the knife hand out and bring the knife straight down on
the opponent from angle 10. This strike commonly targets the subclavian artery when taking out
sentries.

Figure 7-5: Vertical Slash

232 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

OUTSIDE SLASHING TECHNIQUES

11. The outside slash follows a straight line in a forehand stroke, across the target areas of the
body, from angles 1, 3 or 7 (see Figures 7-6 to 7-8):

a. extend the knife hand while simultaneously rotating the palm up until the knife
blade makes contact with the opponent;

b. snap or rotate the wrist through the slashing motion to maximize contact with the
opponent;

c. drag the knife across the opponent’s body in a forehand stroke; and

d. end the movement with the forearm against the body and the knife at the opposite
hip, with its blade oriented toward the opponent.

Figure 7-6: Outside Slash—(Start)

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
233
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-7: Outside Slash—(Mid-point)

Figure 7-8: Outside Slash—(Finish)

234 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

INSIDE SLASHING TECHNIQUES

12. The inside slash is a follow up to a forward attack. It allows for both a secondary attack
and re-adopting the fighting stance. The inside slash follows a straight line in a backhand stroke,
across the target areas of the body, from angle 2, 4 or 8 (see Figures 7-9 to 7-11):

a. extend the knife hand while simultaneously rotating the palm down until the knife
blade makes contact with the opponent;

b. snap or rotate the wrist through the slashing motion to maximize contact with the
opponent; and

c. drag the knife across the opponent’s body, in a backhand stroke, maintaining
contact on the opponent’s body with the blade.

Figure 7-9: Inside Slash—Start

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
235
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-10: Inside Slash—Mid-point

Figure 7-11: Inside Slash—Finish

236 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

THRUSTING TECHNIQUES

13. The primary objective of knife fighting is to stab the opponent to cause damage and
trauma. This is done with a thrusting technique on angle 5 or 6. Thrusting techniques are more
effective than slashing because of the damage they inflict. They are delivered either with a
forward or reverse strike, and can be used with either the hammer or ice pick grip. Thrusting
techniques can be used on their own or combined with slashing.

FORWARD THRUST

14. The forward thrust follows a straight line in to the opponent’s neck (high angle 5) or
abdominal region (low angle 5) (see Figures 7-12 and 7-13):

a. thrust the knife hand, palm down, toward the target, stabbing the blade in to the
opponent;

b. rotate the palm up once the knife is inserted to twist the blade; and

c. extract the knife in a slashing motion.

Figure 7-12: Forward Thrust—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
237
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-13: Forward Thrust—Step 2

REVERSE THRUST

15. The reverse thrust is a follow-up to a forward attack. It allows for both a secondary
attack and re-adopting the fighting stance. The reverse thrust follows a horizontal line straight in
to the opponent from either a high or low angle 6 (see Figures 7-14 and 7-15):

a. with the knife hand held to the left side of the body, palm up, thrust the knife hand
forward, stabbing the blade in to the opponent;

b. rotate the palm down once the knife is inserted to twist the blade; and

c. extract the knife in a slashing motion.

238 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-14: Reverse Thrust—Step 1

Figure 7-15: Reverse Thrust—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
239
Close Quarter Combat

SECTION 4
FUNDAMENTALS OF IMPACT WEAPONS
16. In many close quarter combats soldiers will employ impact weapons. They may employ
extendable or riot batons during aid of the civil power or peace support operations. On the
battlefield, impact weapons are readily available to a soldier who has lost his weapon. In
combat, impact weapon techniques can be used with a stick, club, broken rifle, entrenching tool,
or even a web belt.

17. Grips. There are two common grips for impact weapons, a one hand or two hand grip.
For the one-hand grip (see Figure 7-16), grasp the weapon about 5 centimetres from the base.
For the two-hand grip (see Figure 7-17), grasp the weapon with both hands about 5 centimetres
from either end, the thumbs pointing in to the centre, or use an alternate grip with the thumbs in
the same direction.

Figure 7-16: One-hand Grip

Figure 7-17: Two-hand Grip

18. Stance. The basic fighting stance is the foundation for impact weapon techniques (see
Figure 7-18). The free hand is a vertical shield that protects the ribs or the head and neck,
allowing the soldier to parry the opponent’s attacks. Depending on the weight of the weapon it
should be held approximately shoulder height.

240 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-18: Stance One-hand Grip

19. Movement. Movement during impact weapon techniques is the same as for other close
combat techniques. Ideally, the soldier moves in a 360 degree circle around the opponent to
access different target areas and to gain tactical advantage.

SECTION 5
IMPACT WEAPON TECHNIQUES

STRIKES

20. Strikes are intended to inflict as much damage on the opponent as possible. Striking
techniques are executed using the basic angles of attack, and apply to weapons of opportunity
such as a stick, tent pole, broken rifle, entrenching tool, or pipe. When striking with an impact
weapon the soldier cuts through the target. The hand must maintain a firm grip on the weapon
and the forward knuckles follow the angle of attack in a cutting motion.

OVERHAND STRIKE

21. An overhand strike follows a vertical plane straight down the opponent’s centreline on
angle 10 using a one-hand grip (see Figures 7-17 to 7-21):

a. bend the arm, extending the weapon back over the shoulder;

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
241
Close Quarter Combat

b. rotate the forearm straight down off the elbow to bring the weapon down on the
opponent;

c. rotate the hips and shoulders forcefully toward the opponent; and

d. follow through by allowing the weight of the weapon to go through the target area
of the body.

Figure 7-19: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 1

242 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-20: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 2

Figure 7-21: One-hand Vertical Strike—(Down) Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
243
Close Quarter Combat

UNDERHAND STRIKE

22. An underhand strike follows a vertical plane straight up through the opponent on angle 9
using a one-hand grip (see Figures 7-22 to 7-24):

a. following an inside strike, rotate the forearm and drop the shoulder slightly;

b. rotating the hips and shoulders upward, force the weapon upward through the
opponent; and

c. follow through by allowing the weight of the weapon to go through the target area
of the body.

Figure 7-22: Underhand strike—Step 1

244 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-23: Underhand Strike—Step 2

Figure 7-24: Underhand Strike—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
245
Close Quarter Combat

OUTSIDE STRIKE

23. The outside strike follows a straight line in a forehand stroke across the target areas of the
body on angles 1, 3 or 7 (see Figures 7-25 to 7-27):

a. bend the weapon arm, with the elbow extending to the outside and the weapon
extended over the shoulder;

b. rotate the forearm to the inside, bringing the weapon down on to the opponent,
while at the same time forcefully rotating the hips and shoulders toward the
opponent; and

c. follow through allowing the weight of the weapon to go through the target area of
the body.

Figure 7-25: Outside Strike—Step 1

246 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-26: Outside Strike—Step 2

Figure 7-27: Outside Strike—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
247
Close Quarter Combat

INSIDE STRIKE

24. The inside strike may be a follow-up technique to a forward strike. It allows both a
secondary attack and re-adoption of a fighting stance. The inside strike follows a straight line in
a backhand stroke across the target areas of the body on angle 2, 4 or 8 (see Figures 7-28 to
7-30):

a. bend the weapon arm with the hand near the opposite shoulder, extending the
weapon over the opposite shoulder;

b. rotate the forearm down to the outside bringing the weapon down on the
opponent, while at the same time stepping forward and rotating the hips and
shoulders toward the opponent; and

c. follow through by allowing the weight of the weapon to go through the target area
of the body.

Figure 7-28: Inside Strike—Step 1

248 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-29: Inside Strike—Step 2

Figure 7-30: Inside Strike—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
249
Close Quarter Combat

FORWARD THRUST

25. The forward thrust follows a horizontal plane directly in to the opponent on either a high
or low angle 5 or 6 (see Figures 7-31 to 7-34):

a. from the fighting stance draw the weapon back to a position where it can be thrust
in a straight line toward the opponent; and

b. retract the weapon and follow up.

Figure 7-31: Forward Thrust Angle 5—Step 1

Figure 7-32: Forward Thrust Angle 5—Step 2

250 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-33: Forward Thrust Angle 6—Step 1

Figure 7-34: Forward Thrust Angle 6—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
251
Close Quarter Combat

FORWARD TWO-HAND THRUST

26. The forward two-hand thrust follows a horizontal plane directly in to the opponent on a
high or low angle 5 (see Figures 7-35 to 7-37):

a. adopt a two-hand grip; and

b. shift forward, extending both arms directly to the target to thrust the end of the
weapon in to the opponent.

Figure 7-35: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 1

Figure 7-36: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 2

252 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-37: Forward Two-hand Thrust—Step 3

SECTION 6
BLOCKING TECHNIQUES
27. A block is used to stop or deflect an attack and allow follow-up attacks. Blocks can be
executed with either a one-hand or two-hand grip. With a one-hand grip blocks are executed
along all angles of attack. Blocking with impact weapons can also be used against opponents
using empty hand techniques.

UPPER BLOCK

28. The upper block is used against an overhand angle 10 attack (see Figure 7-38):

a. raise the weapon above the head horizontally to block the blow;

b. place the meaty part of the forearm or the open palm behind the weapon to assist
in absorbing the blow;

c. keep the weapon perpendicular to the opponent’s striking surface to absorb the
impact; and

d. bend the elbows slightly to help absorb the impact.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
253
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-38: Upper Block

LOW BLOCK

29. The low block is used to stop an underhand strike directed at the lower abdomen, groin,
or torso from an angle 9 attack (see Figure 7-39):

a. lower the weapon to just below the groin;

b. place the weapon horizontally;

c. with the meaty part of the forearm or the open palm reinforce the weapon to assist
in absorbing the impact;

d. bend the elbows slightly to help absorb the impact; and

e. arc the body slightly backward from the waist.

Figure 7-39: Low Block

254 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

MIDDLE BLOCK

30. The middle block can be executed to the left, right, or middle of the torso, depending on
the angle the attack is coming from (see Figure 7-40):

a. thrust the weapon vertically in the direction of the attack;

b. if the attack is coming from the outside rotate the hips and shoulders in the
direction of the attack;

c. place the meaty part of the forearm or the open palm behind the weapon to assist
in absorbing the impact; and

d. keep the weapon perpendicular to the opponent’s striking surface to absorb the
impact.

Figure 7-40: Middle Block

SECTION 7
DEFENCE AGAINST WEAPONS
31. If engaged by an opponent armed with an edged or impact weapon the soldier must
establish and maintain an offensive mindset. The soldier must not be concerned with getting hurt
but must attack the opponent and gain the advantage.

32. Weapon Disarming Theory. Remember when faced with an armed opponent to fight
the weapon, as it poses the greatest threat. Do not, however, focus just on the weapon but also
observe the opponent’s entire body. Once control of the weapon is gained attack the opponent
wielding it. The basic principles of weapon defence are as follows:

a. Fight the Weapon. Do not attack in a manner that will compromise defence, but
maintain a reactionary gap until ready to strike, and then attack the weapon hand.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
255
Close Quarter Combat

b. Do not relinquish Control of the Weapon. Once the soldier has the weapon
controlled do not allow the opponent to use that weapon again.

c. Disarm the Opponent. Use techniques to force the weapon from the opponent
and to a position where the soldier has control.

d. Follow-up Techniques. Once the opponent is controlled use further techniques


to neutralize the opponent. For example, if you disarm an opponent with a
firearm the weapon may not have been loaded, so apply striking techniques with
the weapon before attempting to fire it.

33. Disarming Edged Weapons. When unarmed and defending against an opponent armed
with an edged weapon, use anything at hand to assist in defence and to improvise. Maintain a
reactionary gap by placing obstacles in the opponent’s path, or use webbing, helmet or anything
else to extend your reach and distance. Only as a last resort should you attempt to disarm with
empty hand techniques. Other basic principles are as follows:

a. expect to get cut, accept it, and deal with it;

b. establish and maintain an offensive mindset (act, don’t react); and

c. gain control of the weapon, and never relinquish it.

34. Reactionary Gap. Due to the speed with which an edged weapon can be employed and
the speed an opponent can cover ground, it takes a reactionary gap of about 7 metres for the
soldier to draw a pistol and fire two rounds at a charging opponent.

DEFENCE AGAINST OVERHEAD STRIKE

35. To disarm an opponent attacking on angle 10 execute the following technique (see
Figures 7-41 to 7-45):

a. Shift left forward to the outside of the weapon hand.

b. Parry with both hands using the opponent’s momentum to force the weapon down
and stick it in the leg or groin.

c. If the knife sticks in to the opponent, reach behind with the left hand, grab the
handle between the legs, and lift while forcing the head down with the right hand.
Take the opponent to the ground and apply follow-up techniques.

d. If the knife does not stick, maintain a grip on the knife hand, and bring it forward
and execute a basic wristlock takedown. Drive the elbow in to the ground,
snapping the wrist, and apply follow-up techniques.

256 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

e. If the knife fails to stick and travels too far rearward to apply a basic wristlock
effectively, immediately apply a reverse wristlock and a snap kick to the
opponent’s face.

Figure 7-41: Angle 10 Attack

Figure 7-42: Two-handed Soft Block

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
257
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-43: Counter to Angle Knife Sticks

Figure 7-44: Counter to Angle 10—Step 1 Knife Does Not Stick

258 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-45: Counter to Angle 10—Step 2 Knife Does Not Stick

COUNTER TO FORWARD THRUST

36. To disarm an opponent executing a high or low thrust on angle 5 or 6 apply the following
technique (see Figures 7-46 to 7-49):

a. Shift forward and to the outside of the opponent’s attack, and execute a soft open
hand parry to the outside of the attacking arm.

b. Trap the opponent’s wrist with the right hand and pull it in to the body. Step in
with the left foot and drop weight on the elbow to bar the arm and lower the
opponent’s centre of gravity.

c. Stepping back, executing a basic wristlock takedown, drive the elbow in to the
ground, breaking the wrist, and apply follow-up techniques.

Figure 7-46: Soft Open Hand Block

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
259
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-47: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 1

Figure 7-48: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 2

Figure 7-49: Counter to Angle 5/6 High or Low Step 3

COUNTER TO AN INSIDE SLASH

37. To disarm an opponent executing an inside slash from angle 2, 4 or 8 apply the following
technique (see Figures 7-50 to 7-53):

260 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

a. Shift forward and to the outside of the opponent’s attack, and execute a soft open
hand block to the outside of the opponent’s attacking arm.

b. Trap the opponent’s wrist with the right hand and pull it in to the body. Step in
with the left foot and drop weight on the elbow to bar the arm and lower the
opponent’s centre of gravity.

c. Stepping back, execute a basic wristlock takedown and drive the elbow to the
ground, breaking the wrist, and apply follow-up techniques.

Figure 7-50: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 1

Figure 7-51: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
261
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-52: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 3

Figure 7-53: Counter to Inside Slash—Step 4

COUNTER TO AN UNDER HAND ATTACK

38. To disarm an opponent coming at angle 9 execute the following technique (see Figures 7-
54 to 7-56):

a. Thrust the hips back to arc the back forward, and with the hands together and
thumbs crossed execute a two-handed block trapping the knife hand.

b. With the right hand, grab the back of the knife hand, while the left hand maintains
the hold on the wrist. Execute a basic wristlock takedown (see Figures 7-21 and
7-22).

c. Stepping back, execute a basic wristlock takedown and drive the elbow to the
ground, breaking the wrist, and apply follow-up techniques.

262 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-54: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 1

Figure 7-55: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
263
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-56: Counter to Underhand Attack—Step 3

COUNTER TO OUTSIDE SLASH

39. To disarm an opponent executing an outside slash on angle 1, 3 or 7 apply the following
technique (see Figures 7-57 to 7-60):

a. execute a two-handed soft block to the attacking arm;

b. using the momentum of the attacking arm, force the arm across the front while
bending forward;

c. maintaining contact, rotate the hand close to the opponent to an overhand grip on
the wrist;

d. rotate the other hand over the back of the opponent’s hand and execute a basic
wristlock takedown; and

e. apply follow up techniques.

264 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-57: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 1

Figure 7-58: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
265
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-59: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 3

Figure 7-60: Counter to Outside Slash—Step 4

DEFENCE AGAINST KNIFE HELD TO THE THROAT—FRONT

40. The soldier may be faced with an opponent who is pressing a knife against the throat and
is using the opposite hand for further control. If the opponent is in this position, with the knife in
the right hand and pressed against the left side of the soldier’s throat, counter by securing the
opponent’s knife hand with both hands, forcing the knife from the throat (see Figures 7-61 to
7-64). Bring the knife down, attempting to slash the opponent’s arm, and then apply a basic
wristlock takedown and follow-up techniques.

266 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-61: Knife on Left Side

Figure 7-62: Knife on Left Side—Step 1

Figure 7-63: Knife on Left Side—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
267
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-64: Knife on Left Side—Step 3

41. If the knife is on the right side of the soldiers’ neck, counter by trapping the weapon with
both hands, forcing the knife away from the neck (see Figures 7-65 to 7-67). Force the weapon
down to a position where a basic wristlock takedown can be applied, attempting to slash the
other arm on the way down, then apply follow-up techniques.

Figure 7-65: Knife on Right Side

268 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-66: Knife on Right Side—Step 1

Figure 7-67: Knife on Right Side—Step 2

DEFENCE AGAINST KNIFE HELD TO THE THROAT—REAR

42. If the opponent is holding the soldier from behind with a knife against the throat counter
with the right hand, striking the opponent’s elbow to force the knife away from the throat (see
Figures 7-68 to 7-71). Simultaneously grasp the opponent’s knife hand with the left hand to gain
control. Rotate to the right and grasp the opponent’s forearm with the right hand, then force the
opponent’s arm back while simultaneously forcing him back to execute a takedown. Once the
opponent is on the ground apply follow-up techniques. (Note: for this technique the opponent’s
elbow must be far enough forward to reach it.)

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
269
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-68: Knife From Rear

Figure 7-69: Knife From Rear—Step 1

Figure 7-70: Knife From Rear—Step 2

270 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-71: Knife From Rear—Step 3

DEFENCE AGAINST IMPACT WEAPONS

43. When an opponent is armed with an impact weapon it extends his range. The striking
surface of the impact weapon is the tip, and it is at this point where the most power is generated.
Thus the closer the soldier is to the opponent, the less power the strike will have. So to defend
against this the soldier must move quickly to close the distance.

44. To counter impact weapons attempt to employ improvised weapons. If this is not
possible use empty hand blocking and parrying techniques to close the distance. Once at close
range employ strikes, throws and takedowns to gain control of the opponent. Finally apply
appropriate follow-up techniques.

DEFENCE AGAINST FIREARMS

45. An unarmed soldier faced with a firearm must wait until the weapon is within arm’s
reach before attempting to disarm an opponent. Disarming a rifle can be done at mid- or close
range, when the opponent is in front of or behind the soldier. With a pistol disarming must be
done at close range; although a pistol can be disarmed when held to the rear it is recommended
that the soldier wait until the opponent is positioned to the front.

46. Where an armed opponent will not let a soldier close the distance, e.g. by repositioning
himself, the soldier must play on any situation to entice the opponent to close the distance.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
271
Close Quarter Combat

47. Initially, for any disarm, parry the weapon and turn the body so the weapon is taken off
line, or to a position that even if fired the round would not strike the soldier. The soldier should
also maintain contact with the weapon to assist in gaining control.

DEFENCE AGAINST PISTOLS

48. This technique is used when the soldier is unarmed against an opponent to the front
armed with a pistol. Parry against the trigger finger. Striking to the wrist may cause the pistol to
fire due to an involuntary hand reflex. To execute this technique it is essential to draw the
opponent to close range and wait for a distraction before striking (see Figures 7-72 to 7-75):

a. If the pistol is in the opponent’s right hand parry with the right hand, if in the left
hand parry with the left. If the opponent has a two hand grip note which hand
controls the pistol. Pivot the body and simultaneously bring the parrying hand
across the body and parry the weapon off line. Immediately bring the other hand
up and strike and grasp the back of the opponent’s hand. At this point the soldier
will have control of the weapon, and if the opponent attempts to pull the weapon
back the soldier maintains control and keeps the weapon off line.

b. The pistol is rotated upward, then quickly and violently pulled down, tearing the
pistol from the opponent’s hand. If the soldier maintains his grip on the hands the
opponent can be taken to the ground.

c. Once you have control of the pistol, strike with the weapon and move out of the
opponent’s reach.

Figure 7-72: Disarming Pistol—Step 1

272 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-73: Disarming Pistol—Step 2

Figure 7-74: Disarming Pistol—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
273
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-75: Disarming Pistol—Step 4

DEFENCE AGAINST RIFLES

49. To defend against an opponent armed with a rifle two disarming techniques are possible,
one working to the inside (the side of the rifle the opponent is on), the other working to the
outside. Whether the rifle is to the front or the rear the soldier can use either of these techniques.
The only difference is the side the soldier moves to.

RIFLE TO THE FRONT

50. As with the pistol, when you are unarmed and confronted with a rifle to the front it is
essential to draw the opponent within striking range and wait for a distraction before striking. To
execute this technique (see Figures 7-76 to 7-81):

a. parry left or right and grasp the barrel, simultaneously turning the body off line by
pivoting on the ball of the foot on the side executing the parry;

b. shift in with the foot on the side of the parrying hand, and keeping the hand clear
of the muzzle grasp the barrel or handguards with the opposite hand;

c. with the parrying hand execute an elbow strike to the opponent’s head and then
grasp the small of the butt in an overhand grasp;

d. if you are to the inside, pull up on the butt and push down on the barrel, while
simultaneously stepping back with the foot on the parrying side, tearing the rifle
from the opponent’s grasp;

e. if you are to the outside, push down on the butt while pulling up on the barrel;

274 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

f. once you have control of the rifle, step in and strike with the weapon.

Figure 7-76: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 1

Figure 7-77: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
275
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-78: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 3

Figure 7-79: Disarming Rifle to Front—(Inside) Step 4

276 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-80: Disarming Rifle to Front (Outside)

Figure 7-81: Disarming Rifle to Front (Outside)

RIFLE TO THE REAR

51. Draw the opponent to within striking distance and wait for a distraction, then execute the
following technique:

a. note the height of the rifle;

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
277
Close Quarter Combat

b. if the rifle is at shoulder height (see figures 7-82 to 7-84), pivot the body on the
heel of the foot on the parrying side and the ball of the other foot, and parry and
grasp the rifle;

c. step in and execute an elbow strike with the opposite arm and grasp the small of
the butt in an overhand grasp;

d. tear the weapon from the opponent’s hand (as with a rifle to the front working
either to the inside or the outside); and

e. if the rifle is in the small of the back, pivot and execute a lower block (see Figures
7-85 and 7-86).

Figure 7-82: Disarming Rifle to Rear Shoulder Height

Figure 7-83: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Parry)

278 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-84: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Elbow Strike)

Figure 7-85: Disarming Rifle to Rear Small of the Back

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
279
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-86: Disarming Rifle to Rear (Lower Block)

SECTION 8
WEAPON RETENTION TECHNIQUES
52. It is essential that soldiers be alert to their surroundings. There may be times when an
opponent tries to take the soldier’s weapon. To avoid a prolonged struggle the soldier must
understand and apply weapon retention techniques. The following techniques are employed in
non-lethal situations. The following principles apply to weapon retention techniques:

a. Secure. Grab the weapon to prevent the opponent taking it.

b. Strike. Use striking techniques or pain compliance techniques to release the


opponent’s grip.

c. Separate. Increase the distance from the threat.

RIFLE HAND GUARD GRAB

53. If the opponent uses an overhand grasp to seize the rifle hand guards execute the
following technique (see Figures 7-87 to 7-89):

a. trap the closest finger(s) with the thumb so the opponent cannot release his grasp;

b. apply bone pressure to the finger to initiate pain compliance; and

c. rotate the barrel to place it across the opponent’s forearm and apply downward
pressure, similar to a wristlock.

280 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-87: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards)

Figure 7-88: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards) Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
281
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-89: Rifle Retention (Hand Guards) Step 2

RIFLE MUZZLE OR HAND GUARD GRAB

54. If the opponent grabs the rifle muzzle or hand guard apply the following technique (see
Figures 7-90 to 7-92):

a. force the weapon upward at a 45 degree angle to the outside; and

b. violently force the weapon downward and separate it from the opponent.

Figure 7-90: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards)

282 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-91: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards) Step 1

Figure 7-92: Rifle Retention (Muzzle/Hand Guards) Step 2

BUTT STROKES

55. Striking with the rifle butt can control or ward off an attacker. Use the edge of the butt to
strike the inside or outside of the thighs (see Figures 7-93 and 7-94):

a. an inside butt strike targets the femoral nerve;

b. an outside butt strike targets the peroneal nerve; and

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
283
Close Quarter Combat

c. if a strike to one side of the thigh misses, follow back through with a strike to the
other side.

Figure 7-93: Butt Stroke Femoral Nerve

Figure 7-94: Butt Stroke Peroneal Nerve

284 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

OFF-BALANCE TECHNIQUES

56. Off-balance techniques are used to throw an opponent to the ground to retain possession
of the rifle.

57. If the opponent grabs the rifle and pushes, do not push back. Move with the opponent’s
momentum by stepping back, pivoting and forcing the rifle butt in to the opponent’s shoulder or
head (see Figures 7-95 and 7-96). Throw him to the ground and separate him from the rifle.

Figure 7-95: Opponent Pushes Rifle

Figure 7-96: Opponent Pushes Rifle

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
285
Close Quarter Combat

58. If the opponent grabs the rifle and pulls, step on the foot and push forward to off-balance
him and drive him to ground (see Figures 7-97 to 7-99).

Figure 7-97: Opponent Pulls Rifle

Figure 7-98: Opponent Pulls Rifle—Step 1

286 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-99: Opponent Pulls Rifle—Step 2

HOLSTERED PISTOL WITH OPPONENT TO THE FRONT

59. If the opponent goes for the holstered pistol from the front, trap the hand with the pistol
side hand, lowering the centre of gravity and using the full body weight to execute a lateral
forearm strike to the opponent’s forearm (see Figures 7-100 to 7-102).

Figure 7-100: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
287
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-101: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol—Step 1

Figure 7-102: Opponent Grabs Holstered Pistol—Step 2

HOLSTERED PISTOL WITH OPPONENT TO THE REAR

60. If the opponent attempts to grab the holstered pistol from behind, reach across the body
with the left hand and trap the hand(s) on the holster. With the right arm execute either a
hammer fist or elbow strike to the opponent’s head (see Figures 7-103 to 7-105).

288 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-103: Opponent to the Rear

Figure 7-104: Opponent to the Rear—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
289
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 7-105: Opponent to the Rear—Step 2

DRAWN PISTOL TO THE FRONT

61. If the opponent grabs the drawn pistol to the front, execute a lateral forearm strike to the
opponent’s wrist(s) and continue forcing the hand(s) downward, while simultaneously drawing
the pistol hand rearward until the grip on the pistol is broken (see Figures 7-106 to 7-108).

Figure 7-106: Pistol to the Front

290 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Edged and Impact Weapon Techniques

Figure 7-107: Pistol to the Front—Step 1

Figure 7-108: Pistol to the Front—Step 2

SECTION 9
IMPROVISED WEAPONS
62. In close quarter combat the unarmed soldier must improvise weapons. Virtually any
object can be used, e.g. throwing dirt in the opponent’s face to impair his vision, or smashing his
head with a rock or helmet. Be ruthless and use whatever means are available to win the fight.
The following are some examples of what can be used:

a. An entrenching tool can be used to block, slash and thrust at the opponent.

b. Tent poles and spikes can be used to block, strike, and thrust at the opponent.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001
291
Close Quarter Combat

c. Battlefield debris can be used to cut, slash, and stab at the opponent. Other types
of debris such as shovels, axe handles, boards, metal pipes, or broken rifles can
also be used to strike.

d. A helmet can be used to strike the opponent on an unprotected area of the body
like the head or face.

e. Pens and pencils can be used to stab the eyes, the face and stomach

292 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 8
SENTRY REMOVAL

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. In wartime a soldier may have to remove a sentry silently. To avoid detection approach
using a low crouch, advancing from the rear slowly and deliberately. Place each foot silently on
the ground toe to heel, and do not cross the feet. Your normal fighting stance determines which
foot leads, and the lead hand should be free, ready to strike and cover the opponent’s mouth and
nose. Look toward the sentry’s head, as this is where movement will originate. However, avoid
looking directly at the back of the head as the sentry may sense that someone is watching. Use
peripheral vision to detect movement.
2. The sentry will do everything possible to cry out or escape, thus must be silenced quickly
and brutally, as this is a life or death struggle. There must be no hesitation and split second
timing is necessary. The soldier must close aggressively, and then strike swiftly and silently. To
silence a sentry, place the hand over the mouth and nose and twist the head outwards exposing
the neck; ensure the head is forced in to your shoulder, pulling the opponent off balance.
3. If the sentry is tall, step on the back of his knee so that the opponent will drop to a level
which makes it easier to kill silently. As the sentry falls back, control the fall of both the sentry
and any weapons he may have by stepping back with the lead foot, dropping to the knee, and
easing the sentry down to a sitting position, where follow up techniques are easily executed.

SECTION 2
SENTRY REMOVAL WITH A KNIFE
4. The knife is the weapon of choice for sentry removal as it kills quickly and silently. Both
the hammer and ice pick grip can be employed. There are several ways to kill a sentry with a
knife or bayonet.

THE THROAT

5. Attacking the sentry’s throat is the preferred method as it severs the windpipe and
silences the sentry. Execute the attack as follows (see Figures 8-1 to 8-3):

a. close the distance;

b. cup the left hand over the mouth and nose, forcing back the head to expose the
throat;

c. thrust the knife in to the side of the neck behind the windpipe and slash outward
to severe the windpipe; and

d. silently lower the sentry to the ground.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 293
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-1: Close the Distance

Figure 8-2: Throat—Step 1

294 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-3: Throat—Step 2

SUBCLAVIAN ARTERY

6. The subclavian artery is located 5 centimetres below the surface between the collarbone
and the shoulder blade. Attack by thrusting the knife in from above using an ice pick grip (see
Figures 8-4 and 8-5). Once the thrust is made, the knife should slash to create maximum damage
and ensure that the subclavian artery is in fact severed. The blade is then withdrawn, slashing
and enlarging the cut to maximize blood loss. Bleeding to this wound cannot be stopped without
surgery, thus the sentry will loose consciousness quickly and die.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 295
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-4: Subclavian Artery—Step 1

Figure 8-5: Subclavian Artery—Step 2

296 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

THE KIDNEY

7. To attack the kidney thrust the knife in while simultaneously grabbing the sentry’s mouth
and nose (see Figure 8-6). Withdraw the blade, slashing and enlarging the wound. Cut the
windpipe to ensure silence. A thrust to the kidney will cause great shock and internal
hemorrhaging, resulting in death. It is unlikely that the sentry will be able to utter more than a
gasp before death. In both subclavian artery and kidney attacks, the soldier may place the free
hand on the neck of the sentry and squeeze the windpipe, twisting and crushing the larynx.

Figure 8-6: Kidney

SECTION 3
SENTRY REMOVAL WITH A GARROTTE
8. A garrotte is used for strangulation or to sever the neck. It is constructed of any strong
material that is thin and pliable. Wire is commonly used as it can decapitate the sentry. A
bootlace is also effective.
9. It is recommended that the garrotte have handles on each end to improve grip and to
avoid injuring the soldier’s hand.

GARROTTE FROM THE REAR

10. To garrotte a sentry from the rear (see Figures 8-7 to 8-10) approach in a fighting stance
with the loop of the garrotte over the rear hand. Throw the garrotte over the sentry’s head so it is
around the neck. Pivot 180 degrees back to back with the sentry to form a loop in the garrotte.
Pull the garrotte so the sentry’s neck is held tightly and arc your back. Drop the centre of gravity
below the sentry’s and pull forcefully while driving the legs up for a shoulder throw. At this
point the sentry’s head may be decapitated. If the sentry flips over, continue to apply pressure
until unconsciousness or death. Note that this technique is not a silent sentry takeout.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 297
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-7: Stalking the Sentry

Figure 8-8: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 1

298 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-9: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 2

Figure 8-10: Garrotte from the Rear—Step 3

GARROTTE TO THE FRONT

11. If while approaching from the rear the sentry turns to face you drive forward violently
with both hands so the garrotte crosses the throat (see Figures 8-11 to 8-14). Reach behind the
back so that the hands come together in a bear hug, then pull downward, stepping behind one of

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 299
Close Quarter Combat

the sentry’s legs, and take him to the ground. Your hands are now under the sentry’s back with
the garrotte across the throat. Pull downward with the hands until the sentry ceases to struggle.

Figure 8-11: Stalking the Sentry

Figure 8-12: Garrotte to the Front—Step 1

300 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-13: Garrotte to the Front—Step 2

Figure 8-14: Garrotte to the Front—Side View

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 301
Close Quarter Combat

SECTION 4
NECK BREAKS
12. Another method of sentry removal is the neck break. The neck is susceptible to damage
from all angles, however it requires strength and commitment to break an opponent’s spinal
column.

HELMET NECK BREAK

13. To execute the helmet neck break (see Figures 8-15 to 8-17) use the opponent’s helmet as
a weapon to create leverage. Grab the opposite shoulder with the left hand, with the forearm on
the back of the sentry’s neck, simultaneously grabbing the rim of the sentry’s helmet with the
right hand. Then pull the helmet up and back with great force. Your forearm drives the
opponent’s shoulders forward and acts as a lever to break the neck.

Figure 8-15: Helmet Neck Break—Step 1

302 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-16: Helmet Neck Break—Step 2

Figure 8-17: Helmet Neck Break—Step 3

HELMET SMASH

14. If while executing a helmet neck break the sentry’s helmet is undone or the strap breaks,
smash the head repeatedly until the sentry is eliminated (see Figures 8-18 to 8-21).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 303
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-18: Helmet Smash

Figure 8-19: Helmet Smash—Step 1

304 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-20: Helmet Smash—Step 2

Figure 8-21: Helmet Smash—Step 3

NECK BREAK FROM REAR

15. To neck break while approaching from the rear strike the jaw with the right hand, drive
the sentry’s head fully to the left, and immediately wrap the head with both arms in a bear hug
(see Figures 8-22 to 8-25). To break the neck pull the sentry back off balance and kick your legs
out, dropping all your body weight down on the back of his head.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 305
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-22: Neck Break from Rear

Figure 8-23: Neck Break from Rear—Step 1

306 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-24: Neck Break from Rear—Step 2

Figure 8-25: Neck Break from Rear—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 307
Close Quarter Combat

NECK BREAK KNEELING OPPONENT

16. To neck break a kneeling sentry (see Figures 8-26 to 8-28):

a. close the distance;

b. if the opponent has a weapon, control it with the right hand;

c. reach around the opponent’s head with the left arm and apply a reverse headlock;
and

d. drive the hips up in one swift motion to break the neck.

Figure 8-26: Stalking the Enemy

308 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-27: Neck Break Kneeling—Step 1

Figure 8-28: Neck Break Kneeling—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 309
Close Quarter Combat

SECTION 5
TAKEDOWNS

REAR TAKEDOWN

17. A sentry may be quickly taken out by a double leg takedown from behind (see Figures 8-
29 to 8-31). The sentry falls forward and strikes his head on the ground. Quickly move up the
body, placing the knee in the small of the back, and execute a neck break. This technique is
effective against a tall sentry.

Figure 8-29: Stalking the Sentry

Figure 8-30: Rear Takedown—Step 1

310 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Sentry Removal

Figure 8-31: Rear Takedown—Step 2

CROTCH TAKEDOWN

18. To execute the crotch takedown grasp the collar with the lead hand at the back of the
neck, reaching between the legs with the other hand to grasp the crotch or belt (see Figures 8-32
to 8-34). Push forward on the neck while pulling up and to the rear at the crotch, lifting the
sentry off the ground. Once the sentry is taken down, move up the body and execute a neck
break. This technique is not as effective against a taller sentry.

Figure 8-32: Crotch Takedown—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 311
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 8-33: Crotch Takedown—Step 2

Figure 8-34: Crotch Takedown—Step 3

SECTION 6
CHOKES
19. Any of the chokeholds covered in Chapter 5 can be employed against a sentry. Chokes
can be used a prisoner must be taken while minimizing noise. To ensure that the sentry does not
cry out a choke that restricts the windpipe needs to be applied.
20. Chokes may be used to cause unconsciousness, or, if pressure is maintained long enough
or the choke is used to break the neck, to kill the sentry.

312 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 9
RIFLE BAYONET FIGHTING TECHNIQUES

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Close quarter combat is a weapon-based system, in that every infantry soldier is issued a
rifle and bayonet as his primary tools to destroy an opponent at close quarters. Bayonet fighting
skills are warfighting techniques every soldier must master. Training to perfect these techniques
develops skill, confidence, and aggressiveness executing all movements.
2. The bayonet is an offensive weapon that must be used aggressively. Any hesitation,
delay or useless movement may be fatal. The soldier must attack violently until the opponent is
neutralized. Weakness must be detected and exploited. Speed is essential, whether to defend,
counter-attack, or attack, and, ultimately, kill the opponent.
3. Although all parts of the body may be a target, the face and throat are most vulnerable
because a person will react instinctively to protect them. This often leaves other parts of the
body, such as the chest, abdomen, groin and limbs, vulnerable and unprotected.

SECTION 2
BAYONET TECHNIQUES

REST

4. The rest position is used in training. At the command “rest”, the soldier places the butt of
the rifle between the feet and holds the weapon vertically, with the hands on top of the hand
guards (see Figure 9-1).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 313
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-1: Rest

ON GUARD

5. On the command “on guard” the soldier adopts the fighting stance. The weapon is
positioned so the side of the butt is against the right hip at approximately 45 degrees, one hand
on the hand guard, the other on the small of the butt. The soldier leans forward slightly with the
weight evenly distributed (see Figure 9-2).

Figure 9-2: On Guard

314 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

THRUST

6. The thrust is the primary attacking technique. It is executed from the on guard position
about 1.5 metres from the opponent. The thrust is directed against a vulnerable point of the body
such as the throat, face, abdomen, or chest. Hold the weapon firmly and, extending both arms,
thrust the bayonet in to the target area (see Figure 9-3). Put the weight of the body behind the
thrust by shifting or stepping forward when thrusting. The thrust is usually executed when
advancing, and can originate off either foot.

Figure 9-3: Thrust

LEFT AND RIGHT PARRY

7. The parry is a defensive movement used to deflect the opponent’s weapon and create
openings. From the on guard position, strike the opponent’s weapon violently to deflect it either
left or right (see Figures 9-4 to 9-9). Avoid over-extending. The parry should be immediately
followed up with an attack.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 315
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-4: On Guard

Figure 9-5: Left Parry

316 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-6: Left Parry

Figure 9-7: On Guard

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 317
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-8: Right Parry

Figure 9-9: Right Parry

HORIZONTAL BUTT STROKE

8. To execute a horizontal butt stroke step forward from the on guard position with the rear
foot, forcing the rifle butt up and forward across the front of the body, aiming it horizontally at
the opponent’s head or upper body, with your full weight behind the blow (see Figures 9-10 and
9-11). A butt stroke executed correctly will likely stun the opponent, and must be followed with
a slash, thrust or ground point.

318 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-10: Left Parry

Figure 9-11: Horizontal Butt Stroke

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 319
Close Quarter Combat

VERTICAL BUTT STROKE

9. The vertical butt stroke is executed from the on guard or crouching position. Step
forward with the rear foot, forcing the rifle butt up in a vertical arc toward the opponent’s groin,
solar plexus, or chin, with your entire weight behind the blow. Continue to attack if required.

Figure 9-12: On Guard

Figure 9-13: Vertical Butt Stroke

320 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

SMASH

10. The smash may be used when the opponent is backing away to avoid a vertical butt
stroke. Hold the rifle slightly higher than shoulder height, with the butt forward and the pistol
grip up (see Figure 9-14). Force the body forward driving the rifle butt straight in to the
opponent’s face. This technique may also be used following a failed horizontal butt stroke; in
this case the rifle is kept in a horizontal position.

Figure 9-14: Smash

SLASH

11. The slash is used to cut the opponent open using the knife-edge of the bayonet, and is an
effective follow-up to a smash. Extend the left arm while stepping forward, and drive the
weapon down diagonally across the body, striking the opponent between the head and shoulder
(see Figures 9-15 to 9-17).

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 321
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-15: Slash (Start)

Figure 9-16: Slash (Mid-point)

322 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-17: Slash (Finish)

GROUND POINT

12. The ground point is used to finish off the opponent once on the ground. The bayonet is
pointed down to the target. Draw the rifle butt upward then violently thrust downward, driving
the point of the bayonet in to the exposed chest or throat of the opponent (see Figures 9-18 to 9-
20). To extract the bayonet, pull the rifle straight back until the blade is out. After sticking the
bayonet in to an opponent on the ground it may be necessary to place one foot on the chest to
extract the bayonet or, in extreme cases, to fire a round in to the chest.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 323
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-18: Ground Point (Start)

Figure 9-19: Ground Point (Mid-point)

324 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-20: Bayonet Extraction (Finish)

HIGH BLOCK

13. The high block is effective against a high or low vertical attack. Violently extend the
arms upward about 45 degrees from the body (see Figure 9-21). Use the centre of the weapon to
strike the opponent’s weapon on its downward motion, bending the elbows slightly to absorb the
impact. Enough force should be used to throw the opponent off balance and follow up with an
offensive technique.

Figure 9-21: High Block

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 325
Close Quarter Combat

LOW BLOCK

14. The low block is effective block against a vertical butt stroke. Violently extend the arms
downward about 45 degrees from the body (see Figure 9-22). Use the centre part of the rifle to
strike the opponent’s rifle on its upward motion, bending the elbows slightly to absorb the
impact.

Figure 9-22: Low Block

MIDDLE BLOCK

15. The middle block is effective against a horizontal butt stroke. For a right handed firer to
counter a butt stroke from the left (see Figure 9-23), drive the rifle butt downward,
simultaneously pivoting the body to the left to strike the opponent’s rifle with the centre part of
the rifle. To counter a butt stroke from the right (see Figure 9-24), pivot the body violently to the
right, simultaneously forcing the weapon to the right to strike the opponent’s rifle with the centre
part of the rifle. (For left handed soldiers these movements would be reversed.).

326 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-23: Middle Block

Figure 9-24: Middle Block

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 327
Close Quarter Combat

COMBINATIONS

NOTE
FOR TRAINING PURPOSES:
All combinations should end with the soldier in the on guard position.

Combinations ending with a vertical/horizontal butt stroke or a smash should


finish with the soldier executing a slash in to the on guard position.

Combinations should be executed on the attack, with the soldier stepping forward
with each movement (unless using a static dummy).

16. Left/Right Parry Thrust. The aim of the parry is to ward off the opponent’s weapon
and create an opening. This is followed immediately by a thrust to the face or throat.
17. Left/Right Parry—Horizontal Butt Stroke—Ground Point. The aim of the parry is to
ward off the opponent’s weapon and create an opening. This is followed by a horizontal butt
strike in a continuous movement. The butt stroke is aimed at the opponent’s head, and the
ground point is immediately driven in to the fallen and stunned opponent.
18. Thrust following a Failed Attack. If the opponent retreats to avoid the thrust slightly
bend the lead arm, move the rear foot forward, and execute another thrust. A series of thrusts
can be executed until the opponent is struck or off balance and thus vulnerable to another
technique.
19. Thrust—Vertical Butt Stroke. If a thrust is directed at the opponent’s head but passes
over it, bend the lead arm slightly, push forward off the rear foot and bring the butt upward in a
short vertical arc. Aim the butt at the opponent’s groin or solar plexus.
20. Thrust—Horizontal Butt Stroke. If a thrust has been executed to either side of the
opponent, or if it has been dodged, instead of returning to the defensive push forward off the rear
foot and bring the butt across in a wide horizontal arc.
21. Butt Stroke—Smash. If a butt stroke misses the opponent continue until the rifle is in
position to execute a smash, then push forward off the rear foot and aim the rifle butt at the
opponent’s face or throat with as much force as possible.

MULTIPLE OPPONENTS

22. The soldier may face more than one opponent, or in some cases will have an opponent
out numbered. The following are simple strategies for dealing with these situations.

328 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

OFFENSIVE STRATEGY

23. Two against One. Both soldiers advance together, one soldier engaging the opponent
while the other soldier aggressively attacks the opponent’s open flank (see Figure 9-25).
24. Three against Two. The soldiers advance together, the two on the outside engaging the
opponents, while the middle soldier attacking each opponent’s open flank (see Figures 9-26 and
9-27)).

Figures 9-25: Two against One

Figure 9-26: Three against Two—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 329
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-27: Three against Two—Step 2

DEFENSIVE STRATEGY

25. One against Two. A soldier attacked by two opponents must immediately move to a
flanking position, using the first attacker as a shield to prevent the second moving closer (see
Figure 9-28). Once the first threat is taken out, the soldier moves to the second opponent.

Figure 9-28: One against Two


26. Two against Three. If three opponents attack two soldiers, move immediately to the
flanks, forcing the outside opponents in to the centre opponent (see Figures 9-29 to 9-31). Once
an outside threat has been eliminated that soldier attacks the centre opponent.

330 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-29: Two against Three Step 1

Figure 9-30: Two against Three Step 2

Figure 9-31: Two against Three Step 3

SECTION 3
BAYONET TRAINING
27. There are two main methods used for bayonet training:

a. The rifle with bayonet, used against dummies and/or practice targets spaced on
the terrain to simulate combat.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 331
Close Quarter Combat

b. The pugil stick, which increases realism by introducing blocking, movements,


feinting and counter-attacking against an armed opponent. This is the ideal
method to sharpen reflexes and increase aggressiveness.
28. Bayonet fighting must not be taught as a drill. It is a quick, instinctive skill with each
situation likely to demand variations in technique. Soldiers must be encouraged to develop a
style to suit their size and build.

BAYONET OBSTACLE COURSES

29. Bayonet training is conducted throughout all close quarter combat training, initially
during the close quarter combat basic course, continuing at unit level, and then progressing to
instructor training. For bayonet training there are basic, intermediate and advanced bayonet
obstacle courses:

a. Basic Bayonet Obstacle Course. This is the introduction to bayonet training.


The lanes consist of thrust targets, ground point targets, and targets where the
soldier must parry left and right, then deliver a thrust. The soldier first advances
at the walk and then progresses to a run. The aim is for the soldier to advance and
deliver the techniques without changing the pace or stopping.

b. Intermediate Bayonet Obstacle Course. At this level the soldier covers


intermediate bayonet techniques advancing through the range at the walk. The
soldier is then put through a series of exercises simulating battlefield tasks, i.e.
fire and movement, or basic obstacles to fatigue the soldier prior to reaching the
first target. Once at the targets the soldier attacks with combinations at the
double. The emphasis at this level is for the soldier to develop proper techniques
and combat fitness.

c. Advanced Bayonet Obstacle Course. This level is conducted under realistic


conditions. The soldier first advances to the course using fire and movement, and
must negotiate an obstacle course constructed of field fortifications interspersed
with bayonet targets. All techniques are done at the double. Soldiers must be
briefed to engage all targets as they come to them, using all techniques taught at
the basic and intermediate level. Where possible the soldier should advance at
fire team level. This training can also be enhanced using pyrotechnics and smoke.
30. Bayonet training can also be conducted during live field firing ranges during the final
stages of the assault.

BAYONET TARGETS

31. To ensure successful training the soldier must have suitable targets. Properly constructed
targets will reduce damage to the rifle/bayonet and target frames, and injuries to the soldier.
Targets can be permanent or portable.

332 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

32. Three types of targets, the scaffold, gallows and ground target, are used during bayonet
training:

a. Scaffold. This target is used for thrusts and smashes, and can be equipped with a
device for parrying techniques (see Figure 9-32). The frame supports a target
constructed from bags filled with foam rubber, tires or figure 12 targets.

b. Gallows. This target is used for thrusts, butt strokes, slashes, smashes and
parries. The target hangs from the gallows, and can be equipped with a weapon to
facilitate parrying techniques (see Figure 9-33). It is constructed of stuffed
mannequins using old uniforms or coveralls. Tires can also be used as a target.

c. Ground Targets. This target is used for ground points, and consists of foam
filled bags or sandbags (see Figure 9-34).

Figure 9-32: Scaffold Target

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 333
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-33: Gallows Target

Figure 9-34: Ground Target

CONDUCT OF BAYONET OBSTACLE COURSES

33. Conduct of a bayonet obstacle course will vary depending on the level of training and the
available training facilities. The following points deal with basic conduct and safety:

334 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

a. The instructor must instil aggressiveness and determination. Everything is done


at the double except when instructed otherwise. Instructors must not penalize
soldiers for small technical faults.

b. Before beginning the practice identify control measures and words of command.
Whistle blasts should be used to cease activity.

c. During any practice when soldiers are required to pass one anther they do so at
the high port and to the left of each other, i.e. right shoulder to right shoulder.

d. Soldiers pass targets to the left. They return to the start position by moving to the
right of the targets. Left-handed soldiers are always in the right hand lane.

e. Lateral spacing between targets must be a minimum of 3 metres. Targets should


be spaced 3 to 5 metres in line. Portable targets can be positioned in pairs by
placing the second target 1 metre behind and to the left of the first target. To
prevent accidents ensure all targets are placed in the same manner.

f. Soldiers are dressed in fighting order and wear combat gloves to protect the
hands.

g. Instructors should be in position to observe each soldier’s individual actions.

SECTION 4
PUGIL STICK TRAINING
34. Pugil stick training is the most realistic method of teaching bayonet fighting. It gives the
soldier an adversary who thinks, responds and takes corrective action, and who moves, retreats,
dodges, etc. The soldier must learn to remain vigilant and react instantly. A timid soldier will
quickly become tired of being beaten and will counter-attack. As soon as the soldier becomes
aware of the advantages of attack over defence, the soldier becomes self-confident and moves
aggressively.
35. Pugil stick bouts are an excellent method of improving physical fitness. The soldier must
put forth maximum effort during bouts that can last as long as 2 minutes. In order to obtain full
benefit from these bouts proper training, protective equipment, supervision and safety are
required.
36. It is important that the soldier be fully trained before participating in pugil stick bouts.
Lack of technique and knowledge will make a soldier ineffective and increase the risk of
sustaining injuries.

PUGIL TRAINING SAFETY

37. Pugil stick training simulates rifle and bayonet fighting so that effective but safe training
can be conducted. Pugil stick training is the only “full contact” training provided to close quarter
combat trainees. It teaches the soldier to function when faced with stress and violence, and to

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 335
Close Quarter Combat

deliver a blow and take a blow. It also provides physical and mental skills vital to success on the
battlefield.
38. B-GL-381-001/TS-000 Training Safety directs that individuals who have had hernias,
frequent headaches, previous brain concussions, recent teeth extractions or current lacerations
containing stitches be excluded from pugil stick training for safety reasons. A soldier meeting
any of the following criteria will be excluded from pugil stick training:

a. light duties;

b. restricted to wearing running shoes;

c. participation in pugil stick training within the last 7 days;

d. blow to the head within the last 7 days;

e. frequent headaches;

f. concussion within the last 6 months;

g. history of hernias;

h. dental surgery within the last 48 hours;

i. staples or stitches;

j. severe shoulder or head injury within the last 5 years;

k. taking prescription drugs which may adversely affect performance during


training;

l. ear infection or sinus infection; and

m. broken bone within the last 6 months.

SAFETY EQUIPMENT

39. The instructor must inspect all equipment to ensure serviceability. In addition, all
equipment must fit the soldier and be properly adjusted. Combat uniform is worn, with sleeves
rolled down to prevent friction burns. Combat boots are mandatory, as they provide better
protection and support during quick turns and manoeuvring. The following equipment must be
worn during pugil stick bouts:

a. The football helmet has foam rubber wrapped around the bottom of the face cage.
It must fit the head without rocking back and forth, or obstructing the soldier’s
view if struck on top of the head. The helmet must not pivot when struck on the
side.

336 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

b. The neck roll prevents whiplash if the soldier is struck in the head, supports the
head and protects the neck from blows. The tied end of the roll should be on the
front of the soldier’s neck;

c. The chest protector must cover the chest and abdomen to approximately belt
level. All straps must be in place and fastened. Both new and old style
fragmentation vests can be worn as a substitute, but must be completely done up.

d. Groin protection must be in good condition and fit firmly against the body. The
protector must be worn outside of clothing and incorporate a pad around the hips.
Females wear the male protection in order to protect the hips, or units can
purchase a female groin protector.

e. Gloves are either hockey or lacrosse style. They must be in good condition.
Gloves must be worn if the pugil sticks do not have built in hand protection.

f. The mouthpiece is worn on the upper teeth, or covers both the upper and lower
teeth. It must be form fitted to the individual to prevent it being swallowed.

g. Pugil sticks must be in good condition and well padded. Do not use sticks that are
broken or cracked. Padding must be properly fastened and have no tears. The
ends of the stick must not be loose fitting. (To construct a pugil stick see
paragraph 52.)

SAFETY PERSONNEL

40. Instructors running pugil bouts must be qualified Close Quarter Combat Instructors. One
instructor is necessary for each bout. For safety, it is better to have two instructors judging a
bout because each instructor can fully observe one fighter. The best position for observation is
to the right of a fighter. This allows the instructor to see the fighter’s facial expression and body
movement. The instructor’s position must not interfere with the fight. Instructors supervising
bouts must understand their value and limitations. They must be alert for the unexpected, and if
in doubt, the bout must be stopped immediately to prevent injury.

GENERAL CONDUCT

41. Pugil training periods should be organized as follows:

a. safety inspection and kit issue;

b. briefing;

c. warm-up;

d. review;

e. pugil stick drills (give and take);

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 337
Close Quarter Combat

f. pugil bouts; and

g. debriefing.

SAFETY INSPECTION AND KIT ISSUE

42. Before fitting equipment soldiers must be inspected by the instructor. Once the
inspection is complete, soldiers should be issued the kit described in paragraph 39. Instructors
must ensure that all equipment fits properly. The instructor should look for the following during
the inspection:

a. contact lenses or glasses removed (contacts may be worn if the soldier’s vision is
such that it would be detrimental to fight without them);

b. false teeth removed;

c. nothing worn around the neck; and

d. nothing in pockets or attached to belts.

BRIEFING

43. Before bouts commence the officer/senior non-commissioned officer conducting the
training briefs all assisting staff and trainees.

WARM-UP

44. Commencing a pugil fighting session with a proper warm-up is necessary to prevent
injury. The initial warm-up for any session should commence with light exercise to increase
blood flow, then progress to stretching to increase flexibility. Once soldiers are stretched they
should go through a series of conditioning exercises, such as push-ups, crunches, leg raises,
squats, lunges, ankle raises, or any other exercise which will further warm-up and strengthen the
major muscle groups of the body.

REVIEW

45. The review should immediately follow the warm-up. It should focus on and further
develop basic skills, including basic movements done individually and in combination,
incorporating movement in all directions. During the review soldiers practice individually and
not against an opponent.

PUGIL STICK DRILLS

46. For pugil stick drills soldiers will be paired with a partner and form in two ranks facing
each other. The instructor will designate attackers and defenders. He then designates the

338 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

technique the attackers are to execute and the technique defenders are to use to counter the
attack. This part of the lesson should start with basic techniques, such as a straight thrust
countered with a parry left and right, and then progress to combination techniques.

PUGIL BOUTS

47. Following drills the trainees will conduct pugil bouts. Rules governing pugil bouts are as
follows:

a. Before the Bout. Soldiers are paired according to height, weight and gender
(where possible). They must be fully briefed on safety and the conduct of the
bout.

b. Starting the Bout. The instructor designate two fighters, who move in to the
centre of the mats facing each other approximately 2 metres apart and adopt the
rest position. The instructor starts the bout with the word of command “ON
GUARD”. The soldiers adopt this position and then, when given the command
“FIGHT”, attack.

c. Stopping the Bout. There are only two reasons for stopping a bout, either
delivery of a scoring blow or an unsafe condition. The instructor or assistant
instructor may stop the bout any time an unsafe condition is observed. The
instructor will be equipped with a whistle, the primary signal for stopping the
bout. The word of command “STOP” may also be used.

d. Scoring Blows. A scoring blow is an offensive technique delivered to an


opponent’s vulnerable area with sufficient force and precision to be considered a
disabling or killing blow. Scoring blows are not judged solely on the degree of
force with which they were delivered, but on the accuracy and technique
employed. A scoring blow is defined as:

(1) A straight thrust with the blade end of the weapon (red end of the pugil
stick) to the opponent’s face mask, throat or chest protector.

(2) A slash to the side of the opponent’s helmet (below the ear) or neck with
the red end of the pugil stick.

(3) A heavy blow to the opponent’s head with an authorized technique, e.g. a
butt stroke or smash using the butt (blue end) of the pugil stick.

(4) When a scoring blow is delivered, the instructor blows the whistle to stop
the bout. If both fighters are fit to continue and no unsafe condition exists,
the instructor restarts the bout.

e. Unsafe Conditions. A bout will be stopped immediately an unsafe condition


exists. An unsafe condition exists when:

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 339
Close Quarter Combat

(1) soldier is unable to defend;

(2) soldier loses balance and falls down on one or both knees;

(3) soldier falls down completely;

(4) soldier demonstrates instability (e.g. buckling at the knees);

(5) soldier loses muscular tension in the neck and the head snaps back or to
one side;

(6) soldier appears disoriented;

(7) soldier looses control of the pugil stick;

(8) equipment falls off; or

(9) soldier fails to apply proper techniques.

f. If any of these conditions occur:

(1) The instructor, assistant instructor or anyone supervising training will stop
the bout. He will then check the soldier’s condition.

(2) Ensure the soldier is alert and responsive, both verbally and physically.

(3) Question the soldier to ensure comprehension and coherent responses.

(4) Ensure speech is not slurred, and that eyes are focused and not dazed or
glazed.

(5) Ensure legs are not wobbly or shaky.

g. The pugil stick is not to be used as a baseball bat, and will be held the same as the
rifle. Soldiers will only use authorized techniques or face expulsion from the bout
and subsequent disciplinary action.

h. After the Bout. Soldiers will be debriefed. The instructor should discuss the
good and bad points of each soldier’s techniques, including how to improve weak
areas. The instructor then commences subsequent bouts.

i. Other Considerations. Instructors should note the following points:

(1) Competition among groups of soldiers is authorized as long as it does not


overshadow training objectives or compromise safety procedures.

(2) Safety and proper technique are paramount. Safety is more important than
competition.

340 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

(3) The instructor must have a whistle to control bouts.

(4) A stretcher, first aid kit and safety vehicle must be in location.

INSTRUCTOR SUPERVISION

48. An instructor supervising pugil stick training must understand its value and limitations. It
is the instructor’s responsibility to ensure safety, and he must be prepared for the unexpected. If
in doubt, stop the bout. As with all close quarter combat training much emphasis must be placed
on the individual’s level of combat fitness. At the end of each lesson the soldier should be
physically tired. Due to the nature of this training injuries may occur, whether serious or
otherwise, and the instructor must deal with them as they arise in the most appropriate manner.
Soldiers undertaking training must have any injuries checked by proper medical authorities.
49. Instructors must provide a positive training environment. Designating a winner only
undermines this positive training environment. Provide positive feedback to both soldiers, and
ensure soldiers who experience difficulty receive the appropriate feedback to correct their
shortcomings.

SECOND IMPACT SYNDROME

50. Second impact syndrome (SIS) occurs when a second blow to the head produces a second
concussion less than 1 week after a previous concussion (i.e. before recovery from the first
concussion). SIS causes rapid brain swelling and can cause death. Therefore there must be a
minimum of 7 days between pugil stick bouts to reduce the risk of severe injury resulting from
SIS. The 7 day separation between pugil bouts significantly reduces the possibility of injury,
particularly in someone who may have suffered a brain injury or concussion but shows no
symptoms. Any soldier who experiences headaches or the following symptoms after training
must be examined by appropriate medical personnel:

a. blurred vision;

b. ringing in ears;

c. dilation of pupils;

d. slurred speech;

e. bleeding from ears and mouth; or

f. swelling or any unnatural discolouration in head or neck.


51. A soldier who has exhibited these symptoms must not be allowed to participate in pugil
stick training or any other activity where a heavy blow might be sustained for a minimum of 7
days after the headache or other symptoms have subsided.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 341
Close Quarter Combat

PUGIL STICK CONSTRUCTION

52. The material required to construct a pugil stick is described at Figure 9-35. To provide
better protection, the stick handle can be covered with foam rubber, leaving enough room for the
hands. Light sticks can be made heavier by rolling rubber from an inner tube around the central
part of the stick under the layer of foam rubber. To construct a pugil stick:

a. Cut the stick to the required dimensions (see figure 9-35).

b. Spread a sheet of foam rubber 1.27 centimetres thick, 12.7 centimetres wide and
1.22 metres long on a flat surface, and roll it as tightly as possible. Place one of
these rolled sheets at each end of the stick. Apply rubber cement on the contact
surface as the sheet is rolled on.

c. To prepare the end of the stick representing the bayonet, spread a sheet of plastic
foam 1.27 centimetres thick, 29.21centimetres wide and 3.66 metres long on a flat
surface. Apply rubber cement on the contact surfaces and roll it as tightly as
possible around the pod formed by the small roll of plastic foam covering the end
of stick, which was applied in step b. Attach the roll with elastic bands and let
dry at least 24 hours.

d. To make the part of the stick that represents the rifle butt, cut a sheet of foam
rubber, decreasing in width as shown in Figures 9-35 and 9-36.

e. Make two canvas bags 15.2 centimetres in diameter and 35.6 centimetres long.
Use the stitching method shown in Figures 9-35and 9-36.

f. Place the canvas bag on the end of the stick using an adjustable sleeve such as No
28 sheet metal. Slide the canvas cover and metal sleeve on to the end of the stick.
Once the cover is properly seated remove the metal sleeve.

g. Attach the canvas bag to the stick using staples and remove excess canvas. Cover
the staples with cardboard, then wrap tightly with gun tape.

342 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Rifle Bayonet Fighting Techniques

Figure 9-35: Pugil Stick Construction and Materials

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 343
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 9-36: Pugil Stick Construction

344 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 10
GROUND FIGHTING

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. During close quarter combat soldiers should avoid fighting on the ground, as the
battlefield may be covered with debris and, more importantly, they may have to deal with
multiple opponents. Many close quarter combats however will include fighting on the ground.
In any ground-fighting situation the soldier’s main priority is to fight his way back up to his feet.
2. When engaging an opponent on the ground the soldier must first gain control using a
strong ground fighting position, thus gaining a dominating body position. He can then neutralize
the opponent through striking techniques and joint destruction techniques. Once this has been
achieved the soldier must get to his feet and deal with other threats.
3. The intent of ground fighting is not to force the opponent to submit but to control or
destroy him. The soldier must use techniques which destroy the target joint to finish the
opponent. Fighting at this range also presents the problem of concealed weapons draws, due to
the close proximity of the combatants. The soldier must always monitor or control the hands of
the opponent to prevent him using weapons.

SECTION 2
GROUND FIGHTING POSITIONS

MOUNT POSITION

4. The mount position (see Figure 10-1) is used when the opponent is on his back, with the
soldier on top, legs straddling the opponent’s body. This is an offensive position as soldiers are
in a good position to control the opponent and to execute striking and control techniques.

Figure 10-1: Mount Position

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 345
Close Quarter Combat

GUARD POSITION

5. The guard position is a defensive ground position. With the soldier on his back this
allows him to control the opponent and launch offensive techniques. The guard position (see
Figure 10-2) is executed with the soldier on his back and the opponent between his legs. Try to
keep the opponent down and in close to prevent striking. If unable to do this the hips can be
extended to create space. .

Figure 10-2: Guard Position

CROSS MOUNT

6. The cross mount is an effective position for gaining control of an opponent. When on top
this position is effective for striking and for control techniques. In many cases this position is
easily countered so once you have have initially engaged the opponent work to the mount
position. Place the elbows on the ground, one in the notch created by the opponent’s head and
shoulder, the other near the ribs (see Figure 10-3). The leg closest to the opponent’s head should
be straight and the other bent so that the knee is near the opponent’s hip. The chest should be
centred on the opponent’s chest, and your weight should be kept as low as possible.

346 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-3: Cross Mount

SIDE MOUNT

7. The side mount is used when a soldier’s opponent is on his side and the soldier is
mounted on top. In this position it is easy for the soldier to be pulled forward and off balance.
To counter this keep the center of gravity low, by placing a leg as a post in front of the opponent
at waist level and in tight to the body (see Figure 10-4). The other leg is placed behind the
opponent, flat on the outside of the leg, with the soldier’s weight placed back and down. Keep
the upper body close to the opponent’s side.

Figure 10-4: Side Mount

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 347
Close Quarter Combat

SECTION 3
DEFENSIVE GROUND FIGHTING

MOUNT REVERSAL

8. If an opponent mounts the soldier the position must be reversed to prevent the opponent
from gaining control or striking (see figures 10-5 to 10-9). If the opponent is in tight to the
soldier, space must be created by driving the hips straight up and striking with the elbows in to
the opponent’s legs. Use the momentum of the elbow strikes to slide back to a position where
the opponent is located over the soldier’s centre of gravity.
9. Once space has been created trap the opponent’s arm, drawing it in close. Also trap the
opponent’s leg, using the leg on the side to which the reversal will be executed. The soldier’s
other leg must be drawn in as close to the body as possible, and the opposite arm is drawn in and
placed on the opponent’s chest.
10. To execute the reversal, drive the hips up at a 45 degree angle, while the posted leg
simultaneously sweeps the hooked leg across in the opposite direction. The hand that is pulling
the opponent in continues to do so while the other hand pushes.

Figure 10-5: Top Mount Reversal—Step 1

Figure 10-6 Top Mount Reversal—Step 2

348 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-7 Top Mount Reversal—Step 3

Figure 10-8: Top Mount Reversal—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 349
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-9: Top Mount Reversal—Step 5

GUARD REVERSAL

11. The guard reversal is used when in the guard in order to escape to the mount (see Figures
10-10 to 10-12). To begin, shift to one side and create enough space to place one shin across the
opponent’s waist, keeping the other leg out and positioned by the opponent’s waist. Hold the
opponent’s arm in to the side to which the reversal will be executed to prevent the opponent
regaining balance once the reversal has commenced. Make a scissor motion with the legs to
sweep the opponent. Roll with the opponent to adopt the mount.

Figure 10-10: Guard Position

350 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-11: Guard Reversal—Step 1

Figure 10-12: Guard Reversal—Step 2

REVERSAL FROM CROSS-MOUNT

12. When being held in the cross-mount the position must be reversed quickly as the
opponent has many offensive options. The following paragraphs describe three variations of
cross mount reversals. The soldier must decide which one best suits the situation.
13. For the first option (see Figures 10-13 and 10-14), work the hands under the opponent
and then drive the hips up and at 45 degree angle, bridging toward the opponent while
simultaneously pushing the opponent in that direction. Quickly work to the fighting stance, as
control will not have been gained.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 351
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-13: Cross-mount Reversal 1—Step 1

Figure 10-14: Cross-mount Reversal 1—Step 2


14. For the second option (see Figures 10-15 to 10-18), avoid turning away from the
opponent as this will present your back to him and offer him more offensive options. In this
reversal, turns toward the opponent and wrap the leg closest to the head with both arms. Pulling
on this leg, rotate the body around until in line with the opponent. Once in position, pull in with
the arms and drive the shoulder in to the opponent’s centre of gravity, executing a single leg
takedown to the opponent’s guard.

352 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-15: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 1

Figure 10-16: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 2

Figure 10-17: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 353
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-18: Cross-mount Reversal 2—Step 4


15. For the third option execute a technique known as shrimping (see Figures 10-19 to
10-22). Turn in to the opponent and brace the opponent’s leg closest to the head with a hand
placed in the area of the knee. Then extend the arm and force the body away from the opponent,
simultaneously drawing the closest leg to the ground under the opponent and adopting the guard
position. This technique can also be used to reverse the mount position.

Figure 10-19: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 1

354 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-20: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 2

Figure 10-21: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 3

Figure 10-22: Cross-mount Reversal 3—Step 4

ESCAPING THE GUARD

16. The guard is used to defend when on the back as it affords protection and also allows
offensive techniques. A soldier held in an opponent’s guard should work to a dominating body
position. The following paragraphs describe two variations used to escape the guard.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 355
Close Quarter Combat

17. To execute the first option (see Figures 10-23 and 10-24) grab the area of the opponent’s
belt with both hands. At the same time position one knee up against the centre of the opponent’s
buttocks. Apply pressure to the opponent’s thigh by forcing the points of the elbows down the
inside of the opponent’s legs. Once the opponent has released the lock on the legs either pass
under the leg and move to cross-mount, or force the opponent’s leg to the ground and pass over
top to the mount.

Figure 10-23: Guard Pass 1—Step 1

Figure 10-24: Guard Pass 1—Step 2


18. To execute the second option (see Figure 10-25) again place both hands in the area of the
opponent’s belt. With a leg in close to the centre of the opponent’s buttocks, keep the knee in
place and force the body back by straightening the arms, using the back to break the hold. Then
pass to either the side mount or mount.

356 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-25: Guard Pass 2

SECTION 4
OFFENSIVE GROUND FIGHTING TECHNIQUES

ARMBAR FROM TOP MOUNT

19. An opponent on his back will extend his arms to choke or grab the soldier who is in the
mount. To counter this place the hands so one is inside on the chest while the other works
outside around the arm to be trapped, so the hands end up one on top of the other (see Figures
10-26 to 10-29). Thrust down on the chest to cause a chest compression (not to be done in
training), or with one hand on the chest strike the face with the other. Rotate a leg over the
opponent’s head, simultaneously trapping the arm. Your legs should now be locked in place
over the opponent’s chest and face. Now drop back to the side armbar position, pulling in with
the leg crossing the chest and pushing with the leg over the head, keeping both knees close
together. The arms control the opponent’s extended arm, pulling it to the chest while
simultaneously lifting the hips to apply pressure to the elbow joint. If the opponent attempts to
bite the leg, bounce the leg off the opponent’s head until compliance is achieved.
20. In confined space, this technique can be applied without dropping back off the opponent,
but thrusting the hips forward and pulling the arm back once the leg is in place around the
opponent’s head (see Figures 10-30 to 10-34).
21. Both these methods can be applied from the standing position, by stepping over the
opponent, sitting on the elbow, and pulling the hand to the chest or dropping back to the ground.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 357
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-26: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 1

Figure 10-27: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 2

358 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-28: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 3

Figure 10-29: Armbar from Top Mount 1—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 359
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-30: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 1

Figure 10-31: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 2

360 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-32: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 3

Figure 10-33: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 4

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 361
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-34: Armbar from Top Mount 2—Step 5

COUNTER TO A FRONT ARMBAR

22. To counter a front armbar, as the opponent grabs the arm rotate the wrist and grasp the
opposite hand in an overhand grip. As the opponent grabs the arm rotate your wrist and grasp
your hand in an overhand grip. When the opponent attempts to complete the arm bar by rolling
backwards, roll through to the guard position.

ARMBARS FROM THE GUARD

23. To execute an armbar from the guard, when an opponent attempts a choke or straight-
arm, cross the arms and trap the opponent’s arms, applying pressure with the elbows and
forearms (see Figures 10-35 to 10-38). Next strike the opponent’s jaw with the right hand,
pushing the opponent to the left, and simultaneously drive the right heel in to the opponent’s hip
to create space. Move the upper body to the left and hips to the right, simultaneously bringing
both legs up to the right side of the body. The right leg is positioned to hook the head and neck.
Exert downward pressure to roll the opponent on to his back, placing him in the side armbar
position and applying pressure to the left arm.

362 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-35: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 1

Figure 10-36: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 363
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-37: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 3

Figure 10-38: Armbar from Guard 1—Step 4


24. If the opponent drops his body so the right leg cannot be positioned by the opponent’s
head then change the target arm to achieve an armbar.
25. To execute a guard armbar variation (see Figures 10-39 to 10-42), where the opponent
has countered the attack, change the target arm, placing the opponent’s right arm against the left
side of the chest, rolling to the right and leaning back. Bring the left leg from the hip around
above the arm, extending the leg to kick the jaw and continue to a straight leg extension. It is
critical that the opponent’s arm be positioned so the elbow is up, the arm being held tight to the
chest when extending the leg to ensure maximum effect.

364 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-39: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 1

Figure 10-40: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 365
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-41: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 3

Figure 10-42: Armbar from Guard 2—Step 4

STRAIGHT ARMBAR

26. The straight armbar can be applied in either the cross-mount or top mount. To apply the
straight-armbar trap the opponent’s arm out to the side of the body (see Figures 10-43 to 10-45).
Place the arm closest to the head under the opponent’s arm directly above the elbow, and grab
your forearm. The arm closest to the body reaches out and traps the inside of the opponent’s
wrist so the palm is up. Then apply pressure on the opponent’s wrist, simultaneously using the
forearm to raise the arm closest to the head upward to put pressure on the elbow.

366 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-43: Straight Armbar—Step 1

Figure 10-44: Straight Armbar—Step 2

Figure 10-45: Straight Armbar—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 367
Close Quarter Combat

FIGURE 4 ARMBAR

27. The figure 4 armbar can be applied from top mount or cross mount (see Figures 10-46 to
10-48). To apply a figure 4 armbar pin the opponent’s wrist with the arm closest to the head.
Then move the other arm under the opponent’s tricep, grab the wrist, and slide the elbow down
to the opponent’s side. To finish, pin the wrist and lift up on the elbow.

Figure 10-46: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1

Figure 10-47: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1

368 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-48: Figure 4 Armbar—Step 1

SHOULDER RIP

28. The shoulder rip is applied when an opponent pulls the arm and elbow close to the head
to defend against the figure 4 armbar. Maintain the figure 4 grip and place the head to the
outside of the opponent’s arm (see Figures 10-49 and 10-50). To apply pressure force the head
toward the opponent and the hand away from the opponent.

Figure 10-49: Shoulder Rip—Step 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 369
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-50: Shoulder Rip—Step 2

SECTION 5
GROUND FIGHTING CHOKES
29. The priority in ground fighting is to get back to the feet as quickly as possible. At times
soldiers will be able to end a ground fight quickly by executing a choke. Chokes applied during
ground fighting are the same as those used for standing positions. The following paragraphs
describe minor differences when chokes are applied on the ground.

REAR CHOKES

30. Any rear choke can be used on the ground. When an opponent is in a rear choke work to
a position where the opponent will not escape. Once the choke is secured place the legs around
the opponent, hooking both legs between the opponent’s legs (see Figures 10-51 and 10-52).
Once in this position arc the back to apply greater pressure to the opponent’s neck.

Figure 10-51: Rear Choke on the Ground—Step 1

370 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-52: Rear Choke on the Ground—Step 2

GROUND FIGHTING SIDE CHOKE

31. The ground fighting side choke is a vascular choke applied from the guard or mount
position, whether the opponent is on top or bottom. The ground fighting side choke is
particularly effective when the opponent raises his arms and places them on the soldier’s chest or
throat. To execute this technique use the left hand to parry the opponent’s right arm inboard, i.e.
to the inside of the opponent’s reach (see Figures 10-53 to 10-55). Bring the right arm
underneath the opponent’s arm and up around the front of the neck. Keep the fingers extended,
place the back of the blade edge of the forearm against the opponent’s neck just below the ear,
and apply venous pressure down and at a 45 degree angle.
32. If in the mount position dismount to a position beside the opponent. The feet are then
moved around in a clockwise direction to increase pressure.
33. If in the guard position, or if the opponent has top mount, and the opponent is attempting
to choke the soldier, first parry the arms inboard and apply the choke, then reverse the position
and move to the opponent’s side.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 371
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-53: Top Mount

Figure 10-54: Side Choke—Step 1

372 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-55: Side Choke—Step 2

CROSS COLLAR CHOKES

34. There are various ways to apply cross collar chokes on the ground depending on the
physque and dress of the opponent. The following paragraphs describe three positions for hand
placement:
35. For the first choke, insert one hand (with fingers in) in to the back of the opponent’s
collar and grip it (see Figure 10-56). Then insert the other hand in to the collar on the opposite
side. The forearms should be crossed. To apply pressure pull the elbows to the waist and rotate
the hands so the thumbs are against the neck. This choke can be executed from the guard or
mount position.

Figure 10-56: Cross Collar Choke Fingers in

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 373
Close Quarter Combat

36. The second choke has a thumb in grip, and the hands are positioned at the front of the
neck (see figure 10-57). To apply pressure, force the elbows to the ground and the forearms
against the opponent’s throat. This choke is applied from the mount position.

Figure 10-57: Cross Collar Choke Thumbs in


37. For the third choke grab the front of the opponent’s collar with fingers in (see Figure
10-58). The second hand grabs lower on the opponent’s shirt in to the opposite collar. To apply
pressure force the arm across the throat to the ground while pulling the other arm down to the
waist. This choke is executed from the mount position.

Figure 10-58: Cross Collar Choke

374 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

SECTION 6
GROUND COUNTER TECHNIQUES

COUNTER TO REAR CHOKE (ATTEMPTED)

38. If the opponent attempts to place a rear choke the soldier must counter before the choke is
fully applied. If the opponent places his legs around the soldier and locks them, but does not
have his hands around the neck, quickly counter by grabbing the opponent’s upper foot with both
hands (see Figures 10-59 to 10-61). To break the hold pull in on the foot, simultaneously
applying pressure down on to the inside of the opponent’s shin with the elbow.

Figure 10-59: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 1

Figure 10-60: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 375
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-61: Counter to Rear Choke (Attempted)—Step 3

COUNTER TO REAR CHOKE (APPLIED)

39. Once the rear choke is fully applied, act swiftly and violently by reaching back and
attempting to drive the thumb in to the opponent’s eye (see Figures 10-62 to 10-66). Then grab
the choking arm and tuck the chin, violently pivot the hips and drive them in to the opponent’s
groin, and turn in to the choking arm (do not roll off the opponent). Maintaining the grip on the
choking arm, violently roll back in the other direction. As you roll off the opponent pull the
choking arm back, slip the head under, and apply a rear armbar or any other follow-up technique.

Figure 10-62: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 1

376 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-63: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 2

Figure 10-64: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 3

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 377
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-65: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 4

Figure 10-66: Counter to Rear Choke Applied—Step 5

SECTION 7
GROUND COUNTERS TO COMMON ATTACKS

SIDE HEADLOCK FROM THE KNEES

40. The side headlock from the knees starts from a standing side headlock (see Figures 10-67
to 10-70). When the soldier executes the entry technique the opponent drops to the knees. From
this point, reach across the opponent and grip the far side knee and ankle. Then pull the arms
toward the body, simultaneously pushing with the shoulders. Once the opponent is off balance
move to the side mount.
41. If the opponent still maintains the hold, apply stunning techniques, striking the
opponent’s head on the ground. To break the hold, form a frame placing the outside of the
forearm against the opponent’s brachial plexus. Then apply pressure down and toward the head,

378 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

forcing it back. If done correctly the opponent will extend the arm which applied the headlock.
Now apply follow-up techniques, e.g. a wristlock or arm bar.

Figure 10-67: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 1

Figure 10-68: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 379
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-69: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 3

Figure 10-70: Side Headlock from the Knees—Step 4

GROUND SIDE HEADLOCK


42. If the opponent has taken the soldier to ground using a headlock immediately brace the
opponent’s hips with both arms extended (see Figures 10-71 to 10-73). This prevents the
opponent from moving backward and denying the soldier space. Once in this position deliver
knee strikes to the opponent’s back. Then strike with a heel palm to the occipital nerve to
distract the opponent. Now form a frame with the arms and push the opponent away to create
space.
43. Bring the leg closest to the opponent’s head around and place it against the head. Extend
the leg forcing the opponent away. Simultaneously pivot around to the side mount. If the
opponent still maintains the headlock apply stunning techniques and follow up as for the side
headlock from the knees. If the opponent disengages stand and adopt the fighting stance.

380 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-71: Ground Side Headlock

Figure 10-72: Ground Side Headlock—Step 1

Figure 10-73: Ground Side Headlock—Step 2

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 381
Close Quarter Combat

RECOVERING FROM A GROUND POSITION

44. To recover from a ground position, place your dominant hand flat on the ground behind
you (see Figures 10-74 to 10-76). The opposite hand is bent and the foot is placed flat on the
ground, with the forearm resting on the knee. Distributing the weight evenly, raise your buttocks
off the ground and draw your dominant leg back between the hand on the floor and the planted
foot. Stand up and adopt the fighting stance.

Figure 10-74: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 1

Figure 10-75: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 2

382 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Ground Fighting

Figure 10-76: Recovering from the Ground Position—Step 3

DEFENSIVE GROUND POSITION

45. There may be times when the soldier is knocked to the ground while the opponent
remains standing and continues to attack. In this case the soldier sits in position with the legs
chambered and pivots toward the threat using the arms (see Figures 10-77 and 10-78). If the
opponent is moving too fast to pivot in this manner roll on the same side as the direction of
movement. In both cases keep the legs in to prevent stomps or leg bars, and work to your feet as
soon as possible.

Figure 10-77: Defensive Ground Position 1

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 383
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 10-78: Defensive Ground Position 2

384 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Close Quarter Combat

CHAPTER 11
TRAINING TECHNIQUES

SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
1. Professional instruction is the key to successful close quarter combat training. To
demonstrate and practically apply the skills described in this manual instructors must be
physically fit and highly proficient. Confidence, enthusiasm, aggression and technical expertise
are essential. Instructors must continually work to improve their technique, review available
training media, and seek additional training opportunities in order to develop new and
challenging ways to teach close quarter combat.
2. Instructors must teach the techniques demonstrated in this manual and not their own
styles. The techniques in this manual are proven techniques, meet use of force tactical
requirements, and are legally and medically acceptable.
3. Formal close quarter combat training is conducted in two blocks, the Basic Close Quarter
Combat Course and the Advanced Close Quarter Combat Course for instructors. Training during
the Basic Course covers the fundamental techniques, such as stances and movement, striking
techniques, bayonet training and use of force. Continuation training at unit level should focus on
these fundamentals but also incorporate further use of force training; training with impact
weapons, knives and OC spray; ground fighting; and combat fitness training. In order to teach
the Basic Course and conduct unit training the instructor is trained on the Advanced Course to
instruct all techniques in this manual. Instructors at the COE will instruct the Advanced Course.

SECTION 2
INSTRUCTIONAL TECHNIQUE

INSTRUCTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

4. Diligent effort is needed to perfect the various techniques to a level where the instructor
can apply them instinctively and teach them to others safely. The essential requirements for
planning and conducting effective close quarter combat training are as follows:

a. Seek efficiency with minimum effort. Continually strive to reduce all


unnecessary explanations, movement and activity. Streamline training without
compromising content, efficiency or safety.

b. Stress cooperation and technique. Promote suppleness and controlled aggression.

c. Reinforce the details of each technique and provide positive feedback when
warranted. Use humour to motivate soldiers but do not degrade or insult soldiers,
especially those who are having difficulty.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 385
Close Quarter Combat

d. Ensure all training aids are in good repair and that you have sufficient numbers to
cover the soldiers in the class. Ensure the training area is well maintained and
free from dangerous obstructions.

e. Ensure demonstrations are well rehearsed and never conducted with more than
50% speed and power. Ensure assistant instructors know what is being covered
and that they know the techniques.

f. Enforce discipline and professional conduct from all soldiers.

TRAINING SAFETY

5. When training close quarter combat certain safety techniques must be strictly adhered to.
Instructors must make every effort to ensure training is conducted within specified safety
guidelines and with the proper protective equipment. Our greatest resource is our soldiers so we
must constantly strive to keep them safe. The following safety precautions must be followed:

a. A qualified instructor must supervise all training. The ratio is one


instructor/assistant instructor (who must also be qualified instructors) for every 10
student pairs (20 students).

b. Intentional striking of an individual by another, and horseplay, are prohibited.


Students must be made aware of the specific technique to be practiced before it is
executed. Only simulated strikes to vital points, such as the head, neck, and groin
area, are executed. Soldiers may use light blows to other areas but must exercise
caution at all times.

c. When practicing knife and bayonet techniques ensure that scabbards are firmly
attached and, except when on the bayonet range, are taped on. Ensure fingers are
not placed in trigger guards. Approved safety equipment must be used.

d. A first aid kit and stretcher must be available and at least one person qualified
standard first aid must be present during all training sessions and demonstrations.
Instructors must also understand local casualty evacuation procedures.

e. Ensure there is adequate space between soldiers when they are practicing
techniques (an area approximately 2 to 3 metres square is required per partner
pair).

f. Ensure soldiers empty their pockets, and remove all jewellery, ID disks, dentures
and, if possible, glasses.

g. Fingernails must be trimmed and clean, and clothing clean and unsoiled.

h. Students must have mouth guards for appropriate lessons.

386 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

i. A signal must be established to indicate to the partner when to stop the pressure in
grappling, pain compliance and choking techniques (e.g. tapping the partner,
tapping the mats, or a verbal command).

j. During all sparring bouts instructors should have a whistle to control training.

k. Make sure soldiers warm up and cool down before and after practical application.

l. The instructor must inspect the area to be used to ensure that it is suitable (e.g.
outside areas clear of rocks and other debris, and all required safety equipment in
place).

m. All injuries must be reported as soon as possible after they occur.

n. The instructor must inspect all medical chits prior to commencing all classes.

TRAINING AREAS

6. The training area used depends on the type of training to be conducted. Striking
techniques, bayonet and pugil training can be conducted outdoors in areas of soft footing (sand
or grass). Training which includes throws, takedowns, sentry removals, etc should be conducted
on a mat.
7. The size of the training area depends on the size of the class. It should be large enough to
provide an area approximately 2 to 3 metres square per student pair. When training is to be
conducted outdoors the instructor must ensure that the area is clear of natural objects and debris
which may cause injury.

TRAINING METHODOLOGY

8. Instructors must motivate and instil confidence in their students. This can be achieved
through the following methods:

a. Demonstrating a need for the skill. Why is it essential for the soldier to have
this skill?

b. The skill must be attainable. The soldier’s skill sets must work under stress and
must be easily learned.

c. The soldier must have a positive training experience. Soldiers will always
question the validity of the techniques taught. Ensure that techniques are
practiced under intermediate conditions so that the soldier faces an opponent that
offers resistance.

d. The soldier must have a positive field experience. Advanced training


conducted realistically and under field conditions will add to the soldier’s

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 387
Close Quarter Combat

confidence in his abilities and techniques, and will demonstrate to the instructor
those soldiers who require remedial training.

STAGES OF PRACTICE

9. Staged training is very important. The skills taught during close quarter combat training
are unlike any other skill that the soldier learns in the military, because he is trying to influence
the physical behaviour of another potentially or totally uncooperative human at close quarters.
These skills must be taught such that the soldier practices the movement in stages, progresses to
practice the complete movement, and then completes training in simulated operational
conditions. The stages of practice are as follows:

a. Basic. The instructor introduces the skill to the soldier. The technique should be
broken into components, and all components must be practiced separately and
successively. At this stage the skill should be practiced slowly without any
simulated resistance.

b. Intermediate. The soldier practices the skill as a response to a specific type of


resistance. This should occupy most of the time practicing the technique.
Training at this stage should be restricted to no more than 50% full speed and
power to allow the soldier to tie together the separate components.

c. Advanced. This final stage of practice must only be conducted with proper safety
equipment and supervision. Advanced training is full speed scenario based
training to test the soldier’s ability to respond to a specific level of resistance.

CONDUCT OF TRAINING

10. Training at units or on formal courses is conducted the same way, breaking down each
lesson as follows:

a. Safety inspection. Prior to commencing any training soldiers must be checked to


ensure pockets are empty and all jewellery is removed.

b. Warm-up. Start with light aerobic activity to increase the heart rate and
circulation. The warm-up then progresses to stretching techniques with specific
focus on the muscle groups that will have the largest output during that period.
The warm-up should conclude with body hardening techniques, e.g. push-ups, sit-
ups, crunches, leg raises, squats, and lunges.

c. Review. Confirm previously taught techniques, in a manner that leads directly


from the warm-up to the techniques to be practiced/confirmed.

d. Lesson introduction. Describe the “what, why, where” of the lesson and issue
any pertinent safety/control details.

388 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

e. Main body. Introduce the technique with an explanation and demonstration.


During the explanation cover where the technique fits in the continuum of force,
striking surface, concentration of power, target area, and effects on the opponent.
Demonstrations are conducted at 50% speed and power. If possible break the
technique into components, soldiers practicing each part separately until their
instructors are satisfied with their performance. Once the complete movement has
been taught soldiers practice the technique at the intermediate stage. During a 40
minute period the instructor will be able to teach approximately two techniques
and ensure adequate practice, so that the soldier leaves the lesson with a good
understanding of the technique. For more complicated techniques, the instructor
should break the technique down in to stages prior to demonstrating the complete
movement. This gives the instructor maximum control of the class.

f. Conclusion. Conduct the end lesson confirmation as a fluid practice. The


student however should have to demonstrate or react to a number of techniques.
The instructor then restates his lesson objectives, re-motivates the class, and packs
up any equipment used during the period.

g. Cool-down. Soldiers should undergo light activity to lower their heart rates and
then stretching techniques (cool-down provides the soldier the most benefit from
stretching).

CONDUCT OF WARM-UP AND COOL DOWN EXERCISES

11. Given the intense physical activity and high potential for injury it is important that
soldiers be warmed up at the commencement of training and cooled down once training is
complete. A warm-up should prepare the soldier both physically and mentally. A cool down
helps to prevent injury, and stretching at this time will provide greater muscle flexibility. The
following points are specific to each activity:

a. warm-up activity should be applicable to the upcoming lesson, including light


aerobic activity to increase the heart rate and blood flow to the muscles, stretching
exercises, and body hardening exercises; and

b. cool-downs should include light aerobic activity to control heart rate and then
stretching exercises.

BODY HARDENING EXERCISES

12. Body hardening exercises are essential to reduce close quarter combat injuries. The
Army Fitness Manual (B-GL-382-003/PT-001) describes many exercises that may be
incorporated in a close quarter combat warm-up. Some additional body hardening exercises are:

a. Neck Exercise 1. Laying flat on your back, hands on the chest, raise your head
and repeatedly look left and right.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 389
Close Quarter Combat

b. Neck Exercise 2. Laying flat on your back, hands on the chest, raise your head
approximately 5 centimetres. From this position repeatedly bring your chin to
your chest and back to the start position.

c. Bridging. Lay flat on your back, knees bent and feet flat on the floor (see Figure
11-1). From this position lift your hips, arc your back and rotate your body on to
one of your shoulders. Thrust your arms outward to simulate throwing an
opponent from you (used in ground fighting counter to cross mount). Repeatedly
alternate sides.

Figure 11-1: Bridging

d. Sprawl Drill. From a fighting stance, drop down with the arms fully extended
and feet apart, arcing the back with hips down and head up (see Figure 11-2).
From this position use your legs to thrust yourself back up to a fighting stance
(used as a counter to single or double leg takedowns).

390 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

Figure 11-2: Sprawl Drill

e. Mountain Climbers. From a sprinters stance with your head up, alternate
bending the knees and bringing the feet as close to the hands as possible (see
Figures 11-3 and 11-4).

Figure 11-3: Mountain Climbers

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 391
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 11-4: Mountain Climbers

f. Iron Cross. Lay flat on your back with arms fully extended to the side (see
Figures 11-5 and 11-6). Rotate your hips to the left, bending the right knee and
bringing it over the body towards your left elbow. Alternate from side to side
(used as part of the counter to ground fighting rear chokes).

Figure 11-5: Iron Cross

392 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

Figure 11-6: Iron Cross

g. Shrimping Drill. Lay on your side in the shrimping position, knees tight to the
chest (see Figures 11-7 to 11-9). From this position thrust your hips forward and
arc your back Roll to the opposite side and repeat the process (used in the counter
to the ground fighting cross mount).

Figure 11-7: Shrimping Drill

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 393
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 11-8: Shrimping Drill

Figure 11-9: Shrimping Drill

h. Do to the burn time of the ATP system any exercise that incorporates explosive
power is an excellent close quarter combat training tool. Some of these exercises
are push-ups where you clap your hands, burpies, or medicine ball exercises.

SECTION 3
PROTECTIVE TRAINING EQUIPMENT
13. Protective training equipment is a valuable aid for developing close quarter combat skills
and combat fitness. This equipment permits realistic training and develops powerful, speedy
techniques. It also enhances soldier safety while training. Training equipment consists of
sparring equipment and striking equipment.
14. Sparring equipment is required for all forms of sparring and consists of different
categories of equipment depending on the training being conducted. For pugil fighting the

394 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

soldier will require a higher degree of protection than with other techniques. The mandatory
equipment for pugil training is described in Chapter 9 (paragraph 39).
15. When conducting other forms of sparring the soldier must wear appropriate equipment,
as follows:

a. When sparring involving striking techniques the soldier wears head protection
that provides a face shield and remains in place when hit, a mouth guard properly
formed, chest protection, gloves with an open palm to allow grabbing, external
groin protection, and leg protection that protects the shin and the top of the foot.
Soldiers must only wear light shoes when sparring, rather than combat boots.

b. If weapons sparring with sticks or knives the soldier must wear eye protection.
Knives must be rubber with a flexible blade. Sticks must be a padded training
stick with a soft tip.

c. When grappling the soldier must wear a mouth guard and groin protection.

d. When conducting bouts with throwing techniques the soldier must not wear any
equipment, e.g. web gear, that may cause injury if the soldier falls on it.
16. Striking equipment is used during training to provide a target for the soldier. There are
various types of pads which are well suited to this type of training.

a. Heavy Bags are good for all forms of striking techniques. The best is the Muay
Thai bag, which is long enough for both head strikes and low kicks to the leg area.
Bag weight should be at least 68 kilograms.

b. Kick pads are large pads for kicking and require a partner. The soldier holding
the bag must put his arm through the handles and place the free hand on top of the
target. The target must also be kept in tight to the body to prevent injury to both
soldiers.

c. Focus mitts are good for hand and elbow techniques delivered at full power.
They may also be used for knee and kicking techniques delivered with light
power.

d. Muay Thai pads are heavy pads that cover both forearms. They can be used like
focus mitts but are well suited for full powered kicks. The soldier holding the
pads must ensure he is properly braced to absorb the power of kicking techniques.

e. Grappling dummies are life-sized stuffed dummies used to practice throws and
takedowns, ground striking, and submission techniques.

f. Mats are a basic safety item for all techniques. They should be firm enough to
support stand-up techniques, but provide enough shock absorption for throws and
takedowns.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 395
Close Quarter Combat

g. Crash Mats are thick mats used on top of regular mats to practice throwing and
takedown techniques while maintaining safety. Mats should be approximately 3
metres by 3 metres, and at least 45 centimetres thick.

h. Hand wraps must be used to prevent damage to the hand when striking heavy
bags and hard pads.

SECTION 4
SPARRING
17. Sparring is an important part of close quarter combat training as it allows the soldier to
practice techniques under advanced conditions, with a partner who is also trying to influence the
situation. Training at this level produces certain reactions within each soldier. Soldiers must
learn to focus on the techniques, and work through conditions where motor skills deteriorate
under combat conditions. An overall concern in sparring is soldier safety, thus the instructor
must strictly control training to prevent injury and ensure a positive training experience. Soldiers
must also have the safety equipment required for the training being conducted. When
conducting bouts with striking the soldiers must not strike with full contact, since the emphasis is
on control.

NOTE
Instructors will not allow or conduct any full contact bouts. The focus for this
training is control and the development of technique. Instructors will be held
accountable for injuries incurred during unauthorized training.

18. Advanced training can take different forms from basic sparring to protective suit training
to scenario based training. Training at this level must be progressive as many soldiers have not
been involved in any form of fighting, and even fewer have been involved in situations where
their life was at stake. The following progressive steps of sparring will help to condition soldiers
to combat stress situations:

a. Protective Suit Training. The instructor wears a protective suit and the soldier
has basic sparring gear. On commencing the bout the instructor attacks the
soldier, who has to take control of the situation and get the instructor into a
position of control. Remember that this is a training tool and the instructor must
not let ego get in the way.

b. Aggressor-Defender Bouts. This training is conducted with either pugil training


equipment or empty hand. Matches should be timed. The instructor designates
one soldier as the defender and the other as the aggressor. On commencing the
bout the aggressor attacks the defender, and at a set time roles are reversed
without stopping the bout (e.g. in a 60 second bout switches would be made every
15 seconds). The instructor must designate the command word used for the
switch. This type of training is beneficial for the soldier, who only has to focus
on one aspect of the fight. This allows him to gain confidence in the techniques

396 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

covered without being overloaded. Calling the switch without stopping the bout
allows the defender to immediately go to the attack.

c. Standard Bout. This type of bout can be used for pugil fighting, striking
techniques, throws and grappling. The soldier faces off with one or more
opponents, all wearing the appropriate protective equipment. At this level the
soldier employs the techniques taught with light contact. The instructor must
designate techniques which are not allowed, e.g. suplex throws and heel hooks, or
any techniques that will cause serious injury. When conducting multiple
opponent bouts the instructor must maintain control and designate killing blows
on opponents as they occur.

d. Scenario Training. Soldiers should be at an advanced level before undertaking


this training. The soldier wears operational equipment and has to complete an
operational task, e.g. taking control of an opponent or fighting through an obstacle
course. At this level the soldier’s level of combat fitness should be tested, and he
should be tired by the time the fight is reached. Instructors should wear a
protective suit or other suitable targets should be used. At this stage the soldier
can also be subjected to OC spray and/or have to fight through various tasks.

PROTECTIVE SUIT TRAINING

19. Protective suits provide realistic scenario based training by allowing soldiers to strike
targets that would normally be off limits. When training with the protective suit units can
conduct exercises that escalate through the continuum of force.
20. Only qualified close quarter combat instructors wear the protective suit when conducting
this training. Soldiers participating in the exercise wear other protective operational equipment
as indicated in the exercise scenario.
21. Safety considerations working with protective suits are as follows:

a. all equipment must be properly fitted and secured;

b. only light force is permitted to the head, throat, neck and spine, and repeated or
deflected strikes must be avoided;

c. moderate force can be applied to the groin, chest, legs and other vital areas;

d. strikes to the joints and to unpadded exposed areas must be avoided;

e. penetration of the face cage must be avoided, and individuals must wear
protective glasses in mesh face cages and during inert OC spray exercises; and

f. the suit is never to be used with live weapons, i.e. batons, OC spray, rifles and
pistols.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 397
Close Quarter Combat

22. No protective suit will provide the instructor 100% protection. The instructor must
understand how much force can be applied relative to the target and use the following techniques
to further protect himself in the suit:

a. stay loose;

b. do not become rigid or lock joints;

c. avoid planting weight against mats or walls;

d. do not become braced or immobilized;

e. avoid absorbing and stepping into strikes; and

f. incorporate rolling movements.

MULTIPLE OPPONENTS

23. Many times soldiers will have to deal with situations where they are out numbered.
Soldiers must be physically as well as physiologically prepared to deal with this problem. A
group with superior numbers will believe they will be able to achieve an easy victory. This
belief must be challenged immediately. Soldiers must deal quickly and decisively with these
situations to prevent becoming tired or injured, or making mistakes. Deal with multiple
opponents as follows:

a. The first priority is to attack the leader or physically strongest of the group. This
opponent must be dealt with eventually, but by attacking right away the soldier
gains two important advantages:

(1) psychologically, since the group looks to this individual as its leader as the
strongest member, if the soldier neutralizes this target the other members
of the group will second guess their abilities and situation; and

(2) physically, the soldier will be fresh and physically stronger, and dealing
with the opponent in a decisive manner will set the tone of the
engagement.

b. Secondly, the soldier must use the environment to gain advantage. Obstacles
must be used to channel the opponent, and opponents used to block other
opponents, by lining them up to one side. This allows the soldier to focus his
effort in one direction. Once an opponent has been neutralized use him against
other opponents.

c. Finally, soldiers fighting for their lives must use any and all weapons against their
opponents to ensure their survival.

398 B-GL-382-004/FP-001
Training Techniques

TRAINING DRILLS

24. Training drills allow soldiers to practice and improve their technique in order to condition
their responses to stress stimuli and help to improve their level of combat fitness. Drills are
flexible: they can focus on individual techniques or combinations, at all ranges, for a set number
of repetitions or a timed duration, or can be keyed by a partner assisting with the drill. Drills can
be used to confirm techniques during lessons, for warm-ups/combat conditioning, or as part of
unit training. Following are some general training drills:

a. Sequence Training (Give and Take Drills). Pairs are given a sequence of
actions and reactions, and work back and forth changing roles after each
technique (e.g. punching/counter-punching drills). This is also effective when
using weapons. A baton/stick pair can for example attack on designated angles,
such as a number 1 angle, come back on the number 6 angle, then follow through
with a third strike on a pre-designated angle (this drill works through all the
angles of attack, but the first two angles used for the drill are numbers 1 and 6).

b. Timed Drills. Having soldiers execute techniques over a set period is an


excellent way to increase combat fitness. The instructor designates one or several
techniques, and the soldier executes them for a set time. The instructor can also
designate if the soldier should be hitting for speed or power.

c. Focus Pad Drills. Focus mitts are an excellent way to develop hand techniques,
and can also be used for light kicking and knee strikes. These pads are good for
combination techniques at all ranges, however the partner holding the pad must
know the techniques in order to position the pads properly.

d. Circuit Training. In order both to practice and build combat fitness a close
quarter combat technique circuit can be set up. Regular circuit training stands can
be intermixed if desired.

e. Shark Bait. In this drill a soldier stands in a circle formed by opponents. Each
opponent is numbered and given a specific form of attack by the instructor. The
instructor then calls a number and the designated opponent attacks the soldier in
the centre of the ring with the pre-designated attack. The soldier must counter the
attack and gain control of the opponent.

TACTICAL POSITIONING

25. The tactical positioning model (see Figure 11-10) is designed primarily to assist
instructors as a teaching aid, and will be referred to throughout the manual. This model is used
by the instructor as a means to position trainees for class control, but more importantly to explain
angles of approach and attack.

B-GL-382-004/FP-001 399
Close Quarter Combat

Figure 11-10: Tactical Positioning

400 B-GL-382-004/FP-001

You might also like